Quarterlytics / Pebble Group

Pebble Group

pebb · LSE
Claim this profile
Ticker pebb
Exchange LSE
Sector
Industry
Employees 201-500
← All annual reports
FY2021 Annual Report · Pebble Group
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
   2021

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l
a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
e
l
b
b
e
P
e
h
T

The Pebble Group plc

Annual Report 2021

Building brands.
Growing relationships.
Strengthening businesses.

Broadway House
Trafford Wharf Road
Trafford Park
Manchester M17 1DD

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Stay up to date at 
thepebblegroup.com

Building brands.
Growing relationships.
Strengthening businesses.

Our values shape our culture, define who we are, what we do and how we act.

We are one team 
using our diverse skills 
and experience to 
support each other’s 
successes and 
challenges, respecting 
our differences.

Enjoying the journey 
in a culture of 
integrity, transparency 
and fairness, where 
we are proud of our 
past and excited by 
our future.

Ambitious in our 
commitment to 
achieving positive 
results with 
sustainable impact.

Learning and growing 
knowing there is always 
progress to be made.

Connected to all  
our stakeholders 
developing long-term 
relationships by 
engaging to understand 
needs and aspirations.

Our history 

2012

2014

2016

2017

Management buy-out of 
Brand Addition, supported 
by H.I.G. Europe Capital 
Partners LP and by 
Beechbrook Capital LLP

Expanded operations into 
Shanghai, established a 
full-service office enabling 
further development of 
overseas capabilities

Acquisition of US-based 
Gateway CDI (now Brand 
Addition US), increasing 
market share and providing 
greater access to the largest 
single regional market for 
promotional products

Secondary management 
buy-out supported by 
Elysian Capital and 
Beechbrook Capital LLP. 
Formation of The Pebble 
Group as parent company to 
Brand Addition

Financial calendar 

Financial year end

Preliminary announcement of full-year results

Publication of Annual Report and financial statements 

Annual General Meeting 

Preliminary announcement of half-year results 

Financial year end 

Company information 

Nominated adviser
Grant Thornton UK LLP

30 Finsbury Square

London EC2A 1AG 

Broker 
Joh. Berenberg, Gossler & Co. KG, London Branch 

60 Threadneedle Street 

London EC2R 8HP 

Auditors 
PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP

1 Hardman Square 

Manchester M2 3DE 

Legal adviser 
Addleshaw Goddard LLP 

One St Peter’s Square 

Manchester M2 3DE 

Registrar 
Equiniti 

Aspect House

Spencer Road

Lancing

West Sussex BN99 6DA

Financial PR 
Belvedere PR 

25 Finsbury Circus 

London EC2M 7EE 

Registered office 
The Pebble Group plc

Broadway House 

Trafford Wharf Road 

Trafford Park 

Manchester M17 1DD 

Company number: 12231361

31 December 2021

22 March 2022

22 April 2022

24 May 2022

Early September 2022

31 December 2022

The material used in this report has 
been harvested in a responsible 
manner from an FSC accredited mill.

Produced and printed by Perivan.

The Pebble Group plc  Annual Report 2021

131

“  I am very pleased to report on the 

Group’s strong performance in 2021, 
which saw not only a full recovery 
from the impact of the pandemic, but 
an acceleration of strategic progress 
and new customer wins at both 
Facilisgroup, and Brand Addition.”

Richard Law
Chair

Strategic report
2  Highlights 
At a glance 
4 
6  Our businesses 
12  Chair’s report 
14  Chief Executive Officer’s review 
17  Our strategy in action 
18  Our stakeholders 
22  Section 172(1) statement 
26  Sustainability - ESG 
38  Key performance indicators 
41  Chief Financial Officer’s review 
45  Risk management 

Corporate governance
50  Chair’s introduction to governance 
52  Our Governance Structure 
57  Corporate governance statement 
64  Board of Directors 
66  Senior Executives 
67  Audit Committee report 
71  Remuneration report 
80  Directors’ report 
84  Statement of Directors’ responsibilities 

Financial statements
Independent Auditor’s report 
85 
90  Consolidated income statement 
91  Consolidated statement of comprehensive income 
92  Consolidated statement of financial position 
93  Consolidated statement of changes in equity 
94  Consolidated cash flow statement 
95  Notes to the consolidated financial statements 
125  Company balance sheet 
126  Company statement of changes in equity 
127  Notes to the Company financial statements 
131  Company information

2018

2019

2020

2021

Admission to AIM

Acquisition of Facilisgroup in 
North America saw the 
establishment of The Pebble 
Group brand and enabled it 
to diversify and strengthen 
its service offering

Acquisition of software 
assets for Facilisgroup that 
enable the provision of 
further recurring revenue 
services to existing and 
potential Partners

Successful completion of 
Round 1 beta testing for the 
Commercio component of 
Facilisgroup’s digital 
commerce platform

Highlights
Highlights

Financial

REVENUE

ADJUSTED EBITDA1 

BASIC ADJUSTED EPS2

NET CASH3

£115.1m

+39.7%

£15.4m

+57.1%

5.14p

+73.6%

£12.1m

+70.4%

m

1
.
5
1
1
£

m
4
.
2
8
£

m
4
.
5
1
£

m
8
.
9
£

p
4
1
.
5

p
6
9
.
2

m

1
.
2
1
£

m

1
.
7
£

FY 20 FY 21

FY 20 FY 21

FY 20 FY 21

FY 20 FY 21

1    Adjusted EBITDA is defined as operating profit adjusted to add back depreciation of property, plant and equipment, amortisation, share based payments charge and exceptional items

2    Basic adjusted EPS is calculated as profit after tax before amortisation of acquired intangibles, share-based payments charge, and exceptional items divided by the weighted average 

number of shares in issue

3    Net cash is defined as cash and cash equivalents less borrowings (excluding lease liabilities)

Operational
• Strong recovery ahead of pre-pandemic performance levels with Group Revenue of £115.1m for the year to 31 December 2021  
(“FY 21”) (FY 20: £82.4m, FY 19: £107.2m) 40% ahead of the prior year and Group EBITDA of £15.4m (FY 20: £9.8m, FY 19: £15.2m)

• At Facilisgroup, Annual Recurring Revenue (“ARR”) increased by 40% to USD16.7m (FY 20: USD11.9m) and delivered excellent 
EBITDA returns of 60% (FY 20: 61%), demonstrating the business’s ability to both scale revenue and maintain strong margins

• At Brand Addition, FY 21 Revenue was 41% ahead of prior year and 5% ahead of pre-pandemic revenue at £102.4m (FY20: £72.6m) 
• Balance sheet remains strong and cash was ahead of expectation at 31 December 2021, being £12.1m (FY 20: £7.1m)
• The new financial year has started well and in line with our expectations:

 – At Facilisgroup, year to date at 18 March 2022, Gross Merchandise Value (“GMV”) was up 57% year on year with Partners 

implemented or contracted awaiting implementation totalling 211  

 – At Brand Addition, year to date at 18 March 2022, the order intake has been positive and sales invoiced or received to be 

invoiced was up 11% year on year. The supply chain continues to be well controlled

02

The Pebble Group plc  Annual Report 2021

STRATEGIC REPORTFacilisgroup

FY 21

FY 20

FY 19

Brand Addition

FY 21

FY 20

FY 19

ARR

Other revenue

Total revenue

Adjusted EBITDA

£12.2m

£0.5m

£12.7m

£7.6m

£9.3m

£0.5m

£9.8m

£6.0m

£8.2m

£1.1m

£9.3m

Revenue

£5.1m

Adjusted EBITDA

£102.4m

£9.9m

£72.6m

£5.2m

£97.9m

£10.7m

Facilisgroup has a highly attractive business model. In FY 21, 
the business’ uninterrupted revenue growth continued. In 
USD (Facilisgroup home currency), ARR was USD16.7m 
(£12.2m), representing 40% growth over the prior year, as 
the business continued to attract new Partners (customers) 
and create value for its Preferred Suppliers.

Brand Addition FY 21 revenue of £102.4m (FY 20: £72.6m) 
was 41% ahead of the prior year, representing an immediate 
recovery compared to pre-COVID-19 performance of FY 19, 
where revenue was £97.9m. This revenue increase led to 
EBITDA of £9.9m (FY 20: £5.2m) being 90% ahead of prior 
year and moving significantly back towards FY 19 of £10.7m.

This ARR growth converts very strongly through to profit 
with Adjusted EBITDA margins in FY 21 of 60% (FY 20: 61%).

Our FY 21 milestones were met on our internal aspiration to 
be a USD50m ARR business by the end of 2024. Partners 
implemented at 31 December 2021 were 200 (31 December 
2020: 175) with a further six contracted and awaiting 
implementation. GMV and spend with our Preferred 
Suppliers was USD1.15bn (FY 20: USD1.02bn) and USD0.35bn 
(FY 20: USD0.26bn) respectively.

In our Consumer Promotions division (45% FY 21 divisional 
revenues), growth was achieved with our existing clients, 
who, throughout the pandemic, have continued to use 
promotional products as a strategic marketing tool to drive 
sales across their retail outlets.

In our Corporate Programmes division (55% FY 21 divisional 
revenues), growth was achieved through a full year 
contribution of new contracts won in 2020, and the recovery 
of sales through existing clients that were impacted in 2020.

Our goals in 2022 are to:
• grow GMV, spend with Preferred Suppliers and total 

customer numbers with Syncore and Commercio in line 
with our internal aspirations;

• successfully launch Commercio with both our existing 

Partner base and into the wider market to materially grow 
2023 ARR; and

• prepare to launch our order workflow product for 

distributors with less than USD2m sales in mid 2023.

Our client retention has been high and new contracts won 
in 2021 will positively impact 2022. Additional sales 
opportunities also remain from those clients that have not 
yet returned to pre-COVID-19 levels.

Our goals in 2022 are to:
• build upon the revenue growth of 2021 through the 

continued retention of major clients and the successful 
implementation of contracts won in 2021;

• attract new contracts with major international brands through 

our credentials in ESG, technology and creativity; and

• move our gross margins back towards the 30% target 

(FY 21: 28.6%).

The Pebble Group plc  Annual Report 2021

03

STRATEGIC REPORT

At a glance
At a glance

We provide technology, services 
and products to the global 
promotional products industry.

Our Group provides 
technology, services and 
products to the global 
promotional products industry 
through two focused, 
complementary and 
differentiated businesses:

£7.6m Adjusted EBITDA

£9.9m Adjusted EBITDA

11% of Group revenue

89% of Group revenue

Facilisgroup provides technology 
solutions and an digital commerce 
platform to SME promotional product 
distributors in the United States and 
Canada, that enables them to benefit 
from significant business efficiencies 
and supply chain advantages.

Read more on page 8

Brand Addition is a leading provider of 
promotional products and related 
services that help the world’s most 
recognisable global brands build culture, 
awareness and meaningful connections. 
It designs products and product ranges, 
utilising its global network and 
technology infrastructure to source and 
deliver complex, sustainable, creative 
promotional merchandise solutions. 

Read more on page 10

Investment case

Differentiated positioning within the 
$50bn global promotional products space  

Facilisgroup - recurring revenue model, 
technology and long-term deep-rooted 
relationships with its Partners, driving 
high quality scalable earnings

Brand Addition - established leading 
market position, focus on sustainability 
and strong relationships with a 
diversified blue-chip client base

04

The Pebble Group plc  Annual Report 2021

Our markets

The promotional products market is large

Suppliers
Manufacturers 
and decorators

Distributors
Highly fragmented

Working 
Capital

Working 
Capital

Brand, End 
customer
+$50bn global 
market in FY19

Promotional products are used by 
businesses of all sizes and sectors  
and across geographies. 

More than advertising brands, they 
enable businesses to develop customer 
relationships, create engagement,  
build loyalty, and reward customers  
and employees.

Strong track record of 
historical financial growth 
and proven resilience to 
macro challenges 

The Group model is well 
positioned through the 
economic cycle  

Proven, experienced, high 
calibre management team

Focus on governance, strong 
risk management and a 
bespoke ESG framework

The Pebble Group plc  Annual Report 2021

05

Our businesses

Our Group comprises two 
differentiated businesses, 
focused on specific areas.

Our business model

The industry

c.$50bn promotional products market  

Our Group

Providing technology products and services into the global promotional products industry  

Building brands, growing relationships, strengthening businesses 

Our focused 
businesses

Facilisgroup
Technology and services

Brand Addition
Products and services

Target market

SME promotional product distributors

Large global brands

Services

Software as a Service (SaaS) technology  
to power efficiency and growth 

Ecommerce platform for online sales and processing
Supply chain consolidation for supply chain 
advantage 
Community events and training

Design corporate ranges and bespoke products
Source from ethical suppliers
Deliver across the globe

Revenue model

Subscriptions for technology and online stores
Fees for supply chain management resulting in 
recurring annual revenues

Margin on products and services

Geographic hubs

US  Canada

Europe  Asia  US

06

The Pebble Group plc  Annual Report 2021

STRATEGIC REPORTWhere we operate
The Pebble Group is 
headquartered in the 
UK, in a facility that also 
houses the headquarters 
of Brand Addition. 

The Group has offices  
in the UK, the Republic  
of Ireland, Germany, 
China, Canada and  
the United States.

Our vision

Digital commerce, products 
and related services to the 
global promotional products 
industry.

Europe
Manchester 
Dublin
London
Hagen

North America
Ottawa
St. Louis

China
Guangzhou
Hong Kong
Shanghai

REVENUE BY GEOGRAPHY (%) 

EBITDA BY GEOGRAPHY (%) 

3%

10%

4%

7%

FY21

FY20

4%

1%

1%

FY21

FY20

35%

40%

29% 32%

57%

57%

55% 65%

Europe 

North America

China 

RoW

Europe 

North America

China 

RoW

Our vision is to be the industry leader in 
digital commerce providing a combination 
of integrated products that offer the full 
suite of technology required for 
entrepreneurial businesses to grow and 
professionalise.

Our vision is to be the industry leader in 
providing products and related services, 
under contract, to the best-known brands in 
the world that use promotional products as 
a key engagement tool.

The Pebble Group plc  Annual Report 2021

07

Our businesses
Our businesses

Facilisgroup provides a digital commerce platform 
to mid-size promotional products businesses in 
North America, which enables those businesses to 
benefit from significant business efficiency through 
its technology and to gain meaningful supply chain 
advantage from the ability to purchase from quality 
suppliers under preferred terms.
Our recurring revenues, 96% of FY 21 total revenues, are 
derived from subscriptions for technology and a proportion 
of the gross merchandise value flowing through the platform. 

Established in 2004 and acquired by The Pebble Group plc in 
December 2018, Facilisgroup provides a SaaS-based platform 
to support the operations of SME promotional product 
distributors based in the United States and Canada. 
Facilisgroup has built a community of over 200 SME 
promotional product distributors, over 80 Preferred Suppliers 
in North America and in the year ended 31 December 2021 
processed over $1.15bn of sales (2020: $1.02bn) in the 
promotional products sector. A typical Facilisgroup Partner 
generates between $2million and $20million of annual sales. 

Facilisgroup attracts and retains Partners through its 
proprietary Syncore software, consolidating the buying power 
of its Partners and developing its community of Partners and 
suppliers through learning and networking events. It 
generates revenue through two main pillars: subscription 
revenue from providing technology to its Partners and 
income from its suppliers for coordinating the consolidation 
of spend. In 2021, Facilisgroup carried out a beta launch of 
Commercio, a new product that provides distributors with 
the opportunity to deploy and operate online stores, a key 

selling tool for Partners and many entrepreneurial businesses 
in the sector. This accelerates Facilisgroup’s ability to market 
in support of its vision to become the technology leader in 
the promotional products industry. 

Facilisgroup is headquartered in the US with offices in Canada. 
Its aspiration is to be the technology leader in the North 
American promotional products market, with a medium term 
aspiration to become a $50m ARR business by the end of 2024.

Learn more at facilisgroup.com

Target market: SME promotional product distributors
Revenue model: Subscriptions for technology and online 
stores, fees for supply chain management 
Manages: Over $1.15bn sales (up from $1.02bn in 2020) in 
the promotional products sector from 200 Partners (up 
from 175 in 2020) in the US and Canada 
Attracts and retains“Facilisgroup Partners” through a 
combination of highly regarded technology, consolidation 
of buying power and community learning and networking 
events

PERCENTAGE OF GROUP 
REVENUE (%) 

PERCENTAGE OF ADJUSTED 
EBITDA (%) 

11%

12%

FY21

FY20

FY21

FY20

54% 43%

Facilisgroup’s business model
High visibility of recurring revenues with a growing customer base

Note: percentages for Adj. EBITDA exclude central costs 

Facilisgroup
Technology and Services

Order Workflow

Ecommerce Stores

Marketing  
Marketing  
Support  
Fund 
(~20% FY20 Revenues)
(~40% FY 21 ARR)

Subscriptions for 
Subscriptions for 
Order Workflow 
Order Workflow 
(~80% FY20 Revenues)
(~60% FY 21 ARR)

Subscriptions for 
Ecommerce 
Online Stores  
Stores 
(New in FY21)
(New in 2022)

Preferred suppliers
North America

Partners
SME distributors 
(Typically, $2m - $20m 
revenues)

Working 
Working 
Capital
Capital

Working 
Working 
Capital
Capital

Brand, End customer
$25bn market in North 
America, FY19

08

The Pebble Group plc  Annual Report 2021

STRATEGIC REPORTThe Pebble Group plc  Annual Report 2021

09

Our businesses

Brand Addition provides promotional products  
and related services that help the world’s most 
recognisable brands build culture, awareness and 
meaningful connections. We extend our client’s 
values in thoughtful, sustainable, globally conscious 
ways to create branded moments that people love. 
Its largest contracts are valued in the millions of pounds, with 
the products and services supplied being used for brand 
building, customer engagement and employee incentives. 

Working in close collaboration with its clients, Brand Addition 
designs creative and sustainable products and product 
ranges, hosts client-branded ecommerce platforms and 
provides international sourcing and distribution solutions 
throughout Europe, North America and Asia. It utilises its 
global network to ethically source and deliver complex and 
creative product solutions. 

Headquartered in Manchester, it has locations in Europe, the 
US and Asia. Revenues are categorised into two divisions: 
Corporate Programmes that support clients’ general 
marketing activities through B2B and B2C stakeholder 
engagement and Consumer Promotions that support clients 
in driving their own sales volumes across all retail channels. 

Brand Addition’s business model 
Win, grow, retain, repeat

Target market: Large global brands
Revenue model: Margin on products and services
Supporting clients: Globally and locally with offices in 
Europe, the US and Asia
Excellent track record of attracting and retaining many of 
the world’s leading brands through intelligent imagination, 
ethical and bespoke sourcing, international distribution and 
logistics and technology solutions

PERCENTAGE OF GROUP 
REVENUE (%) 

PERCENTAGE OF ADJUSTED 
EBITDA (%) 

FY21

FY20

FY21

FY20

88% 89%

46% 57%

Note: percentages for Adj. EBITDA exclude central costs

Suppliers
Europe, Asia, North America

Brand Addition
~$100m revenues

Creative Services

Ecommerce  Platforms

Sourcing & Quality Control

International Logistics   

Working 
Capital

Global Account Management

Working 
Capital

Supply Chain Compliance

Brand, End customer
Large corporates, under 
contract, seeking >£’m pa 
revenues per contract

Corporate Programmes, 
brand support
(~55% FY21 revenues)

Consumer Promotions, 
driving sales
(~45% FY21 revenues)

Learn more at brandaddition.com

10

The Pebble Group plc  Annual Report 2021

STRATEGIC REPORTThe Pebble Group plc  Annual Report 2021

11

Chair’s report

I am very pleased to report on the 
Group’s strong performance in 2021, 
which saw not only a full recovery from 
the impact of the pandemic, but an 
acceleration of strategic progress and 
new customer wins at both 
Facilisgroup, and Brand Addition. 

12

The Pebble Group plc  Annual Report 2021

The performance highlights the strength of the Group’s 
leading position in the promotional products industry, the 
capability of its management, the quality of the technology 
it continues to build and bring to market, and its 
sustainability credentials. 

The work of our team of talented people over the last year 
has significantly increased the Group’s capability and 
long-term future potential and the Group Board believes 
that the prospects of The Pebble Group in the year ahead 
and beyond are very good.

Strategy and Long-term Vision
The Pebble Group’s central tenet is that the global 
promotional products industry (estimated value circa 
USD50bn annually) is ripe for positive disruption, driven by 
three principal factors:
• the requirement from users of promotional products and, 
in particular, from leading global brands for confidence in 
the sustainability and provenance of those products; 
• the opportunity to deploy leading edge technology to 

what is a mature market to make it operate more 
sustainably and efficiently for large global corporations; 
and

• the global market is very fragmented, the majority of 
which is served by owner managed SMEs with a high 
concentration in North America. As sustainability 
standards rise and technology proliferates, SMEs will be 
disadvantaged without a platform like Facilisgroup which 
addresses both these issues.

The Pebble Group is disrupting this market through its two 
complementary but non-competing business units, 
Facilisgroup and Brand Addition.

Facilisgroup
Facilisgroup is a Software as a Service (SaaS) business 
providing leading digital commerce technology to SME 
businesses in North America, which enables them to 
automate processes and workflow and will provide 
ecommerce stores to their own customers, bringing 
material efficiency in process to their businesses.

The growth and profitability of Facilisgroup illustrates the 
efficacy of its technology with like-for-like growth in Annual 
Recurring Revenue (ARR) in the Period of 40% and EBITDA 
margins of 60%. Facilisgroup grew its total revenue in FY 21 to 
£12.7m and the strategy of the executive team is to accelerate 
this rate of growth through significant ongoing investment in 
our technology, sales and marketing, and people. 

STRATEGIC REPORTTeam
The Group is led by a Board with a wide diversity of 
experience, supported by highly engaged and motivated 
teams across the business. It is this combination of 
leadership that will enable us to scale the business 
successfully and profitably. 

To provide the opportunity for our teams to share in the 
value of the Group they have helped to create, we launched 
our first Group Sharesave Plan (SAYE) in September 2021, 
which was taken up by 46% of eligible employees. 

Summary and outlook
Facilisgroup and Brand Addition performed well in the year 
under review, both financially and in building their 
differentiation in the market. The strong financial 
performances strengthened the Group’s balance sheet, 
which, together with our ongoing cash generative 
operations, gives us the ability to continue investing in, what 
the Group Board believes to be, high quality strategic 
opportunities, with the aim of further establishing its 
leadership position in the very large but fragmented global 
promotional products market.

The new financial year has started well and in line with our 
expectations and the Group Board looks forward to the 
year ahead and beyond with confidence.

Richard Law
Chair
22 March 2022

Brand Addition
Brand Addition, which was impacted by the pandemic in 
2020, has fully recovered with its FY 21 revenue increasing 
by 41% on the prior year and 5% ahead of pre-pandemic 
revenue in FY 19. The business remains focused on its core 
strategy to win, grow, and retain international contracts, 
often valued in millions of pounds per year, with many of the 
world’s leading brands. During the year under review, Brand 
Addition increased its revenues through expanding its 
business with existing key clients, implementing new 
contracts won in FY 20, as well as winning major new 
contracts in the year, which will benefit FY 22. 

The business has a differentiated and, we believe, market 
leading position. As a strategic level partner with long-term 
contracts, it is able to meet both its own and its clients’ 
increasing sustainability and ESG targets, and it is able to 
deploy differentiated services including technology, product 
innovation, inventory control and logistics to maximise the 
effectiveness of clients’ promotional products strategies. 

Environmental, Social and Governance (ESG) 
In October 2021, we published our first standalone ESG 
report in which we set out our approach to ESG and 
showcased how we are integrating ESG into the Group. Our 
strong ESG credentials already set Brand Addition apart in 
its markets and form an important element of its client 
relationships. The 2021 report showed the four ESG 
cornerstones, which underpin our bespoke ESG framework, 
linked to the topics that most impact our business and are 
of the greatest importance to our stakeholders. Updates 
since the launch of our first report are set out in the Annual 
Report 2021.

We are committed to a culture of strong corporate 
governance and, where appropriate for our business, to go 
beyond the required compliance level. We put our Directors’ 
Remuneration Report to a shareholder vote at our AGMs and 
have taken initial steps to evolve our risk framework to align 
with the Task Force on Climate-related Financial Disclosure 
(TCFD). During the year, we reviewed succession planning and 
talent pipeline development, and further enhanced the 
reporting and flow of information from Facilisgroup and Brand 
Addition to the Group Board. We have also worked internally, 
and with external experts, to validate our risk register 
approach and we are in the process of implementing the 
recommendations made.

The Pebble Group plc  Annual Report 2021

13

Chief Executive Officer’s review

Review of The Pebble Group businesses

Facilisgroup

ARR

Other revenue

Total revenue

Gross profit

Gross profit margin

Adjusted EBITDA

Operating profit/(loss)

FY 21

FY 20

FY 19

£12.2m

£0.5m

£12.7m

£12.7m

100%

£7.6m

£5.1m

£9.3m

£0.5m

£9.8m

£9.8m

100%

£6.0m

£4.6m

£8.2m

£1.1m

£9.3m

£9.3m

100%

£5.1m

£(9.5)m

Facilisgroup has a highly attractive business model. In FY 21, 
the business’ uninterrupted revenue growth continued. In 
USD (Facilisgroup home currency), ARR was USD16.7m 
(£12.2m), representing 40% growth over the prior year, as the 
business continued to attract new Partners (customers) and 
create value for its Preferred Suppliers.

This ARR growth converts very strongly through to profit with 
Adjusted EBITDA margins in FY 21 of 60% (FY 20: 61%).

Our FY 21 milestones were met on our internal aspiration to be 
a USD50m ARR business by the end of 2024. Partners 
implemented at 31 December 2021 were 200 (31 December 
2020: 175) with a further six contracted and awaiting 
implementation. Gross Merchandise Value (GMV) and spend 
with our Preferred Suppliers was USD1.15bn (FY 20: USD1.02bn) 
and USD0.35bn (FY 20: USD0.26bn) respectively. Growth 
across these key indicators heavily influence the fee structures 
within the business and result in a very robust and predictable 
recurring revenue stream.
We believe the market opportunity for Facilisgroup is very 
strong. In the highly fragmented market of the North 
American promotional products industry, we have evolved 
Facilisgroup to be a digital commerce platform, supporting 
the growth and efficiency of distributors and suppliers. 
Within this platform there are three components designed to 
meet the full suite of technology requirements of 
entrepreneurial distributors and suppliers across the 
industry, as follows:
Syncore is our order workflow product on which we have 
grown Facilisgroup to date. Focused on the distributors of 
more than USD2m sales, more than 850,000 sales orders 
were processed through this technology in FY21, smoothing 
order friction and supporting the growth of both our 
Partners and suppliers. At 98%, the retention rate of 
Partners in the Period was very high.

We are pleased to report the Group’s full year 
results for the year ended 31 December 2021 
which demonstrate a strong performance and an 
immediate and full recovery from the pandemic-
driven demand challenges experienced in 2020.

Group revenue increased by 40% on the prior 
year to £115.1m (FY 20: £82.4m, FY 19: £107.2m) 
and Adjusted EBITDA by 57% to £15.4m  
(FY 20: £9.8m, FY 19: £15.2m).

14

The Pebble Group plc  Annual Report 2021

STRATEGIC REPORTOne of our values:

Enjoying the journey in a culture 
of integrity, transparency and 
fairness, where we are proud of 
our past and excited by our 
future.

Then, our order workflow product for the many thousands 
of smaller distributors with less than USD2m sales is 
currently in development. This will significantly increase our 
addressable market and our expectation is to launch this 
product in mid 2023.
Commercio is our ecommerce product that creates online 
stores for our Partners and can either stand alone or will 
integrate into our order workflow products. The market 
opportunity for a sector specific ecommerce solution is 
significant. We estimate that our existing Partners host circa 
2,000 online stores with the wider North American market 
many times more. Our Partner appetite for this service 
through Facilisgroup is high. We expect to start contracting 
with them from 1 June 2022 and exit the year with a growing 
momentum of Partner uptake, as further enhancements are 
delivered. The planned revenue model will be a monthly fee 
based on the number of stores used, in effect increasing our 
percentage fee per USD of GMV. 

We are focused on a successful scaling of Facilisgroup and are 
investing in our sales and marketing activities to support this.

Our goals in 2022 are to:
• grow GMV, spend with Preferred Suppliers and total 

customer numbers with Syncore and Commercio in line 
with our internal aspirations;

• successfully launch Commercio with both our existing 

Partner base and into the wider market to materially grow 
2023 ARR; and

• prepare to launch our order workflow product for 

distributors with less than USD2m sales in mid 2023.

2022 has started well. Partners implemented, or contracted 
awaiting implementation, total 211 at 18 March 2022, with 
GMV and spend with Preferred Suppliers respectively being 
57% and 66% ahead of same period last year. In addition, the 
indication of appetite from Partners for Commercio has 
been very positive.

Brand Addition

Revenue

Gross profit

Gross profit margin

Adjusted EBITDA

Operating profit

FY 21

FY 20

FY 19

£102.4m

£29.3m

28.6%

£9.9m

£7.1m

£72.6m

£21.2m

29.2%

£5.2m

£2.6m

£97.9m

£30.8m

31.5%

£10.7m

£9.1m

Brand Addition FY 21 revenue of £102.4m (FY 20: £72.6m) was 
41% ahead of the prior year, representing an immediate 
recovery compared to pre-COVID-19 performance of FY 19, 
where revenue was £97.9m. This revenue increase led to 
EBITDA of £9.9m (FY 20: £5.2m) being 90% ahead of prior 
year and moving significantly back towards FY 19 of £10.7m.

Working in close collaboration with its clients, Brand 
Addition designs products and product ranges, hosts 
client-branded ecommerce platforms, and provides 
international sourcing and distribution solutions.

We categorise our revenues into two divisions: Consumer 
Promotions that supports our clients in driving their own 
sales volumes; and Corporate Programmes that supports 
our clients’ employee engagement and brand building 
activities. Both divisions delivered strong growth during the 
year.

In our Consumer Promotions division (45% FY 21 divisional 
revenues), growth was achieved with our existing clients, 
who, throughout the pandemic, have continued to use 
promotional products as a strategic marketing tool to drive 
sales across their retail outlets. Brand Addition has 
increased its market share with these clients through 
consistently meeting expectations regarding quality, and 
creativity, alongside sourcing through a visible and 
responsible supply chain that meets client ESG 
expectations.

In our Corporate Programmes division (55% FY 21 divisional 
revenues), growth was achieved through a full year 
contribution of new contracts won in 2020, and the 
recovery of sales through existing clients that were 
impacted in 2020.

Our client retention has been high and new contracts won 
in 2021 will positively impact 2022.  Additional sales 
opportunities also remain from those clients that have not 
yet returned to pre-COVID-19 levels. 

The impact of the global supply chain disruption, including 
raw material price increases, freight capacity issues, freight 
rate increases, and Brexit, affected the promotional 
products industry like most others. The quality and 
experience of the established teams across Brand Addition 
together with our strong relationships with our suppliers and 
clients ensured that the impact of these complexities on our 
clients was controlled and minimised. Equally, our gross 
margins were only slightly reduced to 28.6% (FY 20: 29.2%). 
As we look forward, our ability to manage our supply chain 
over the last two years, together with current activities, 
leave us well-placed to continue to successfully navigate 
these challenges, some of which, remain in 2022.

The Pebble Group plc  Annual Report 2021

15

Outlook
2022 has started well and in line with our expectations.

At Facilisgroup, we expect to meet our 2022 internal 
aspirations for GMV and spend with Preferred Suppliers, and 
continue to target the total customer numbers using our 
expanding digital commerce offering. To 18 March 2022, 
GMV is 57% ahead of the prior year comparative. Partners 
implemented or contracted awaiting implementation total 
211, plus, the indication of appetite from Partners for 
Commercio has been positive.

At Brand Addition, year to date at 18 March 2022, the order 
intake has been positive and sales invoiced or received to 
be invoiced was up 11% year on year. The supply chain 
continues to be well-controlled by our teams.

We have a very motivated management team and remain 
focused upon the delivery of our plans. We look forward to 
further updating stakeholders on the progress of the Group 
throughout the year.

Christopher Lee
Chief Executive Officer
22 March 2022

Chief Executive Officer’s review

Our goals in 2022 are to:
• build upon the revenue growth of 2021 through the 

continued retention of major clients and the successful 
implementation of contracts won in 2021;

• attract new contracts with major international brands 

through our credentials in ESG, technology and creativity; 
and

• move our gross margins back towards the 30% target (FY 

21: 28.6%)

2022 has started well. Year to date at 18 March 2022, the 
order intake has been positive and sales invoiced or 
received to be invoiced was up 11% year on year. The supply 
chain continues to be well-controlled by our teams.

People and Environmental, Social and Governance
Against an uncertain background, our people have 
supported our businesses in achieving its results, 
demonstrating great dedication and flexibility. The diversity 
of our businesses, our people, and the geographies in which 
we operate, brings great strength to the Group and I thank 
everyone at Facilisgroup, Brand Addition, and The Pebble 
Group for their support, thoughtfulness, and ability to 
achieve positive outcomes over this very challenging period.

Our ESG strategy has continued to advance in 2021. We 
have detailed our approach, targets, and activities within 
our first stand-alone ESG report published in October 2021, 
and then summarised our progress in our Annual Report 
2021. 

Our approach is guided by much of the published best 
practice materials including the QCA Code and UN 
Sustainable Development Goals as well as feedback from 
our teams, clients, and investors. Then, we have identified 
our priorities that balance what is most practical, and 
makes the largest positive contribution, before our 
dedicated ESG resource ensure we follow through on our 
initiatives and embed them into our day-to-day operations. 
We will continue to evolve and commit to this approach, 
knowing its positive contribution to our long-term success.

16

The Pebble Group plc  Annual Report 2021

STRATEGIC REPORTOur strategy in action 

Becoming a  
partner of choice.

One of our values:

Ambitious in our commitment  
to achieving positive results with 
sustainable impact.

The promotional products sector globally is estimated to be c.$50bn. We believe that the market is 
evolving quickly and growing in importance in the world’s most sophisticated economies.

The market is highly fragmented. The Pebble Group is one of the 
largest businesses in this industry, processing $1.3bn of sales orders 
in 2021, but we, together with the other large operators, account for 
less than 10% of the market, with the remainder accounted for by 
small and mid-tier distributors.

The Group’s two businesses serve different parts of this market: 
Facilisgroup provides technology to SME distributors in North 
America and Brand Addition provides promotional products to large 
global brands.

Facilisgroup’s aspiration is to be the technology leader in the North 
American promotional products market with a medium term 
aspiration to become a $50m ARR business by the end of 2024. 

Brand Addition’s core strategy is to win, grow and retain multi-
country out-sourced contracts, often valued in millions of pounds 
per year, with many of the world’s leading brands.

In 2021 we stated our intention to expand Facilisgroup’s technology 
products and to reach a wider potential new client base by launching 
an integrated digital commerce platform for existing Partners and an 
order workflow technology platform for smaller distributors, below 
US$2m, not serviced by our existing product. Together, Facilisgroup’s 
three technology products will provide the spectrum of technology 
that powers the efficiency and growth of entrepreneurial promotional 
product distributors in North America and underpins the business’ 
annual recurring revenue ambitions.

Strategic objective

Progress made in the year

Priorities for 2022

Organic growth opportunities

Brand Addition: Win, Grow, Retain, Repeat

Win client contracts with major 
brands

Grow with existing clients across 
geographies and across brands

Retain major client contracts

The business has been successful in winning a number of significant global 
contracts during the year. The majority of these client wins were implemented 
in FY 21 and are expected to have a material impact to FY 22 revenues. 
(For further commentary on revenue from new clients in FY 21, please refer 
to the Key Performance Indicators section of this report on pages 38-40).

In our Consumer Promotions division we grew our market share within a 
number of client relationships where our product was used to support 
their product sales. In Corporate Programmes, where COVID-19 severely 
disrupted client activities in FY 20, overall spend from existing clients grew 
but some clients remain in recovery compared to FY 19.
(For further commentary on growth in revenue from existing clients in FY 
21, please refer to the Key Performance Indicators section of this report 
on pages 38-40).
Our Top 20 clients, historically representing between 60% and 70% of 
annual revenues, remained clients at the end of FY 21.
(For further commentary on revenue by client concentration in FY 21, 
please refer to the Key Performance Indicators section of this report on 
pages 38-40).

Facilisgroup: Growth driven by an integrated digital commerce platform

Syncore
Order workflow, distributors  
with sales of > $2m

Growth in Partner numbers is a key indicator of future performance and we 
continued this acceleration with Partner numbers increasing from 175 to 200 
in the year.
(For further commentary on the increase in Partner numbers in FY 21, 
please refer to the Key Performance Indicators section of this report on 
pages 38-40).

Continue to win significant new client 
contracts.

Build upon the robust performance of our 
Consumer Promotions division and seek the 
return to growth from all clients in our 
Corporate Programmes division.

Continue to evolve the services provided to 
our existing Top 20 client relationships and 
deliver long-term value to the business.

Continue to attract new Partners to  
this product.

Commercio
Ecommerce platform,  
all distributors 

Order workflow product
Order workflow, distributors  
with sales of < $2m

Investment continued into evolving technology to improve the services we offer to 
our Partners and Preferred Suppliers.
We launched, in beta format, ecommerce stores under the brand 
Commercio to increase new services to existing Partners and attract new 
Partners to Facilisgroup.

Exit beta mode and launch to existing Partners as 
a subscription service by the end of Q2 22.
Further develop this product to offer beyond 
our existing Partners and into the wider 
promotional products market in early 2023.

Investment started in the development of an order workflow product to 
support small (<$2m GMV) distributors. 

Accelerate the investment into this product, 
aiming to be in a position to launch into the 
market in 2023.

Selective consideration of acquisitions by the Group

The Pebble Group

Deploy capital on selective acquisitions 
that accelerate the ability of the Group 
to create long-term value through 
additional technology products or the 
ability to expand into additional sectors  
or geographies.

The business did not proactively pursue any acquisition opportunities in 
FY 21, focusing on significant organic growth plans.

Continue to create excellent value for 
shareholders. Acquisition opportunities may 
continue to help support organic growth in 
the long-term development of the Group.

The Pebble Group plc  Annual Report 2021

17

Our stakeholders
Our stakeholders

Listening to  
our stakeholders.

Stakeholder engagement
Investing in, and developing, our stakeholder 
relationships are central to our Group values.  
We believe building, and maintaining, effective 
stakeholder engagement makes people want to 
work with, purchase from, sell to, and invest in us.  

One of our values:

Connected to all our 
stakeholders developing 
long-term relationships by 
engaging to understand needs 
and aspirations.

This approach is cascaded down through our businesses in 
pursuit of the success of the Group. Our stakeholders are key 
to our decision-making and are considered by the Board of 
Directors of the Group (the “Group Board”) and also by our 
senior team as part of the decision-making process.  

Our Key Stakeholders 
The Company has identified the four key stakeholder groups set out below, the issues that are most relevant to each of them 
and details how it has, and continues to, engage with each of them.

How we engage 

Key topics of engagement

Impact of engagement

Our Teams
Why we engage

The sustainable success of 
our business depends upon 
our engagement with our 
teams. 

We engage to promote the 
Group’s corporate culture 
and cascade our ethical 
values, behaviours and 
expectations. 

We aim to create a positive 
and inclusive culture, 
sensitive to the issues that 
affect our people, so they 
can thrive and grow.

We engage to ensure that 
we continue to develop and 
invest in our highly talented 
and dedicated people in the 
right way.

The promotional products sector globally is estimated to be 

between $40m and $50m. We believe that the market is evolving 

quickly and is growing in importance in the world’s most 

sophisticated economies.

market with the remainder accounted for by small and 

mid-tier operators. These small and mid-tier-market 

operators are often unable to maximise their potential 

because they cannot independently leverage the best 

technology or buying power available in the industry.

Facilisgroup supports these businesses in North America by 

providing a spectrum of technology that powers the 

efficiency and growth of these entrepreneurial businesses.

• Encourage feedback, 

including via team surveys, 
employee forums and  
one-to-one discussions
• Use of structured personal 
development plans and 
formal assessment tools 

• Enhancing training 

opportunities via Learning 
Management Software 
(LMS)

• Management development 

programme

• Regular business 

performance and strategy 
updates directly from our 
CEO, CFO and senior team

• Access to anonymous 
whistleblowing service
• Operation of the Long 

Term Incentive Plan (LTIP) 
and Group Sharesave Plan 
(SAYE)

One of our values:

We are one team using our 
diverse skills and experience to 
support each other’s successes 
and challenges, respecting our 
differences.

18

The Pebble Group plc  Annual Report 2021

• Company vision: one, 
three, and five-year 
strategic plans including 
opportunities for 
departmental growth and 
advancement

• Pandemic impact: how the 
Company has responded, 
what this means for our 
teams, and changes to our 
way of working

• Return to office strategy: 
need for a flexible working 
environment with support 
for team health and 
well-being

• Opportunities for growth 
and development and 
support in reaching full 
personal potential

• Embracing diversity, equity 

and inclusion (DEI)

• Environmental impact of 

our organisation: our work 
on ESG and commitments 
to sustainability

• Social impact of our 
organisation and 
community initiatives

• Teams are informed and 

therefore engaged 

• Increased and improved 

flexibility in working 
patterns

• Improved transparency of 
individual styles at all levels 
across Facilisgroup and 
better informed decision-
making on team structure 
and recruitment

• Formal adoption of Group 

DEI policy (See ESG 
pages 26-37)

• Improved focus on talent 
pipeline and development 
of succession planning 
aligned with DEI (See 
Nomination Committee 
activity on pages 54-55)
• Promotion of leaders from 

within our businesses, 
alongside new talent 
sourced externally

• Implementation of ESG 

initiatives and successful 
social and community 
engagement (See ESG 
pages 26-37)

• Incentivisation of teams is 
aligned with the Group’s 
long-term performance 
and shareholder value

STRATEGIC REPORT 
 
Clients and Partners
Why we engage

How we engage 

Key topics of engagement

Impact of engagement

• Pandemic impact: our 
response and client 
support

• Ongoing development and 

improvement of our 
technology, services and 
client support

• Collaboration on growth 

strategies

• Training to enhance the 
benefits of using our 
technology with a focus on 
ensuring engagement

• ESG and sustainability: how 
we can support and deliver 
on clients’ and Partners’ 
ESG commitments, whilst 
also achieving our own

• Client retention: Clients 
and Partners have shown 
they value long-term 
relationships. Through the 
pandemic, Brand Addition 
secured new business and 
retained contracts with all 
key clients and Facilisgroup 
Partner retention rates 
were near 100% 

• Facilisgroup’s community 

supports Partner 
collaboration and growth
• Brand Addition continues 
to place sustainability at 
the centre of its five-year 
strategic development plan 
‘ba.ONE sustainability and 
growth’

• Recruitment of a 

‘sustainability manager’  
in Brand Addition

Effective engagement is key 
to attracting, and retaining, 
a quality client and Partner 
base from which we can 
nurture strong and long-
term relationships.  

Our clients’ and Partners’ 
success is driven by the 
quality of our products and 
services. We ensure 
continued investment in the 
right technology, services 
and teams to enhance our 
relationships and create 
long-term value on both 
sides.

• Via regular one-to-one 
feedback discussions 
across multiple client 
touch points

• In person and virtual 

meetings/events to update 
on business objectives and 
provide opportunities for 
shared learning

• Dedicated ‘Partner 

Success Managers’ in 
Facilisgroup whose key 
role is to maintain regular 
ongoing contact with 
Partners

• Hosting regular in person 

small group events  
(7-10 Partners) at 
Facilisgroup HQ

• Facilisgroup weekly 

newsletter called ‘411’

• Monthly virtual education 
sessions on key topics for 
Facilisgroup Partners

• Quarterly Business 

Reviews with key Brand 
Addition clients

• Client questionnaires at 

Brand Addition, including 
Net Promoter Scores 
which allow us to measure 
client satisfaction

The Pebble Group plc  Annual Report 2021

19

 
 
Our stakeholders

Strategic suppliers
Why we engage

The quality of our products 
and services is heavily 
influenced by the careful 
management of our 
relationships with our 
strategic suppliers. 

Facilisgroup’s suppliers are 
trusted partners delivering 
to a shared customer base. 
Supplier engagement is a 
key part of the Facilisgroup 
business model. Developing 
the community between 
Preferred Suppliers and 
Partners creates additional 
opportunities for all.

Ensuring we retain, and 
develop, our diverse and 
robust supply base is more 
important than ever to 
manage global supply chain 
challenges. Brand Addition’s 
collaboration with key 
suppliers in Asia, Europe, 
and North America develops 
and ensures robust  
long-term trusted 
partnerships with suppliers 
that conform to clients’  
and Group’s expectations  
on ethical values, ESG, and 
sustainability standards.

How we engage 

Key topics of engagement

Impact of engagement

• Through use of formal 

• Supply chain impact and 

written contracts, 
negotiated transparently 
and openly to set clear 
expectations

• Via regular face-to-face 
and virtual meetings to 
discuss performance and 
provide feedback
• Ongoing two-way 

evaluation processes to 
facilitate business 
improvement and address 
ultimate client demands
• Supplier networking events 
providing efficient, easy 
access to growth and 
development 
opportunities

• Formal audit processes 
providing feedback and 
opportunities for 
development

risk mitigation from 
product sourcing to 
logistics and delivery. This 
relates to both direct and 
indirect production, 
Brexit, shipping and their 
impact on lead times and 
costs 

• Changing industry trends 
and future relationships

• Efficiency strategies, 
growth opportunities
• Supporting the Group’s 
ESG and sustainability 
commitments and goals, 
specifically: environmental 
impact of product being 
supplied, packaging, supply 
chain

• How the Group can assist, 
influence, and develop its 
suppliers’ own ESG and 
sustainability plans

• Suppliers value mutually 
supportive relationships 
and in both Facilisgroup 
and Brand Addition, spend 
with Preferred Suppliers 
grew in FY 21 vs FY 20
• Long term relationships 

with our suppliers enabled 
us to continue to secure 
products while supply 
chains were challenged
• Successful navigation of 
supply chain pressures 
allowed Brand Addition to 
deliver to agreed 
schedules for its clients at 
volumes ahead of FY 19 

20

The Pebble Group plc  Annual Report 2021

STRATEGIC REPORT 
 
Shareholders and the wider investment community 
How we engage 
Why we engage

Key topics of engagement

• Supply chain and logistics 
disruption and Company 
capabilities to manage and 
mitigate risk

• Business recovery post 

pandemic

• Changes to our industry as 
a result of the pandemic
• Group approach to ESG 

and corporate governance 
(see ESG pages 26-37)

• Group approach to 
diversity, equity and 
inclusion (see Nomination 
Committee activity on 
pages 54-55)

We seek shareholders who 
are aligned with our 
long-term objectives for the 
Group. Access to long-term 
capital supports our 
strategy. We therefore strive 
to develop our investors’ 
understanding of our 
business model, strategic 
objectives and culture. 

Through open and 
transparent engagement 
with the investor 
community, we aim to 
ensure the Group’s 
operations and financial 
performance are clear and 
understood, and to provide 
the necessary information 
to ensure investors can 
make informed judgements 
about the Group.

Investors and analysts 
require our engagement on 
ESG to guide their 
investment stewardship 
activities.

• Publication of Annual 

Report and Accounts and 
Annual ESG report
• Regular and detailed 

trading updates to the 
market

• Open access investor 

presentation by CEO and 
CFO including live Q&A via 
a live webcast. (FY 20 and 
HY 21 webcasts available 
on the Company’s website)

• Participation in formal 
Broker-hosted events 
including live Q&A to 
extend reach our senior 
executives

• Availability of CEO and CFO 

to answer questions 
around trading updates 
throughout the year 
• One-to-one investor 

meetings or calls with the 
CEO/CFO at the full year 
and interim results

• Detailed ‘Investor’ section 
on the Company’s website
• Annual General Meetings 
and availability of Chair of 
the Group Board and Chair 
of each Board Committee 
to answer questions
• Ad-hoc meetings or 
written responses as 
requested by existing and 
potential shareholders and 
analysts

Impact of engagement

• Improved investor 
knowledge and 
understanding of the 
Group, its operations and 
activities, with extended 
reach to senior executives
• Investor relations activity 
and feedback discussed 
regularly at Board 
meetings and factored into 
decision-making by the 
Group Board

• Improved transparency of 
Group information with 
open access Investor 
Relations content available 
on the Company’s website
• Group Senior ESG Officer 
increased active support 
to the Group Board and 
Operating Boards to 
ensure the highest 
standards and delivery on 
ESG commitments 

• Formal adoption of Group 

DEI policy (See ESG 
pages 26-37) linked to 
succession planning

• Steps taken to ensure early 

alignment to TCFD 
reporting requirements

The Pebble Group plc  Annual Report 2021

21

 
 
Section 172(1) statement

We strive to maintain our 
reputation for high standards of 
business conduct. At The 
Pebble Group our emphasis is 
on making decisions with 
regard to acting equitably and 
for the long-term. 

One of our values:

Connected to all our 
stakeholders developing 
long-term relationships by 
engaging to understand needs 
and aspirations.

This section describes how the 
Directors had regard to the matters in 
Section 172(1) (a) to (f) of the 
Companies Act 2006 in Board 
discussions and actions, behaviours 
and decision-making, when performing 
their duty to promote the success of 
the Company for the benefit of 
shareholders as a whole during 2021. 

The Group Board and senior team 
know that considering all our 
stakeholder relationships, having 
proper regard to our stakeholders’ 
interests and being aware of the 
external impact of our activities on the 
communities and environments in 
which we operate, will ultimately drive 
value to our shareholders and secure 
our long-term success.

Our Group Board reporting template 
includes Section 172(1) guidance and 
prompts to ensure each paper explains 
which stakeholders are relevant to a 
decision, what long-term factors must 
be considered in all decision-making, 
and that appropriate time is allotted 
for open and in-depth discussion. 

The table below depicts three 
examples of key decisions made during 
2021 which focussed on issues that are 
important to the Company’s long-term 
success. It describes each stakeholder 
group that was relevant to the decision 
and how they, and other matters set 
out in Section 172(1), were considered:

22

The Pebble Group plc  Annual Report 2021

STRATEGIC REPORTSignificant investment in 
Facilisgroup technology products.

How Directors had regard to 
stakeholders’ interests and 
engagement output

How Directors had regard to 
other Section 172(1) matters

The results of engagement with our 
clients and Partners outlined on 
page 19 informed the Group Board 
that development of an integrated 
digital commerce platform to support 
online sales was key for their business 
efficiency and evolution. The Group 
Board therefore understood the 
implications for client retention. 
Feedback from prospective clients 
informed the Group Board that our 
ability to offer this integrated solution 
was key to their decision-making. 

The Group Board used this information 
to conclude that accelerating 
investment in this platform was critical 
to both Partner retention and 
acquisition.

The Group Board’s communication 
with investors on plans to scale 
Facilisgroup as a key strategic initiative 
meant that the decision to accelerate 
investment in this platform was critical 
to meeting shareholder expectations 
in the medium-term.

Culture
The Group Board considered the 
positive impact on the Company’s 
culture of reinforcing the importance 
of creativity, innovation, continuous 
progression, optimisation and business 
transformation through the 
introduction of and investment in new 
technology products. 

Reputation 
The Group Board had regard to how 
remaining at the forefront of the 
transformation and growth of the 
promotional products industry with 
leading technology products was 
important to maintaining the 
Company’s reputation.

Long-term impact
The decision was concluded to be of 
long-term benefit and likely to 
promote the success of the Company 
for the benefit of its shareholders as a 
whole.

The Group Board carefully 
considered the impact of the 
decision to increase levels of 
capital expenditure to 
accelerate the investment  
into Facilisgroup’s digital 
commerce products. 

Key stakeholder groups

Our clients and Partners
Investment in the continued 
development of existing technology 
and introduction of new technology 
products is a key strategic objective. 

This investment will ensure the 
technology utilised by our Partners and 
clients continues to evolve, supporting 
retention and attracting new clients and 
Partners to the Group. The introduction 
of new products will enable us to reach 
new clients and Partners, supporting 
the delivery of our ambition for 
Facilisgroup to be a $50m ARR business 
by the end of 2024. 

Shareholders and the wider 
investment community
Our medium-term ambition for 
Facilisgroup was shared with investors 
in March 2021 as part of our FY 20 
results presentation. Driving scale in 
Facilisgroup to deliver $50m ARR by 
the end of 2024 will deliver significant 
value to our shareholders.

The Pebble Group plc  Annual Report 2021

23

Section 172(1) statement

Launch of Group 
Sharesave Plan (SAYE).

The Group Board strongly 
supported the launch of our 
SAYE to all eligible employees 
after previous postponement 
due to COVID-19 disruption.

Key stakeholder groups

Our teams
Directly impacted by opportunity of 
share ownership in the Group.

Our shareholders and the wider 
investment community 
There is significant interest in the 
extent of employee engagement and 
retention across our businesses; and 
the alignment of our employees with 
the creation of long-term shareholder 
value.  

How Directors had regard to 
stakeholders’ interests and 
engagement output

How Directors had regard to 
other Section 172(1) matters

The results of engagement with our 
teams outlined on page 18 informed 
the Group Board that the introduction 
of the SAYE was considered an 
opportunity for employees and would 
be received positively. As a result, the 
Group Board decided to maximise 
employee participation by (i) 
implementing a sub-scheme for US and 
Canada employees on as similar terms 
as possible; and (ii) ensuring maximum 
flexibility in option terms for example 
no minimum length of service 
condition for participation.

The shareholder advisory vote in 
favour of our Remuneration 
Committee Report (which noted our 
expectation to implement the SAYE) in 
the 2021 Annual General Meeting 
(AGM), and investor meetings 
discussions informed the Group Board 
that our shareholders and the wider 
investment community supported 
plans that encourage long-term 
employee engagement and align the 
objectives of the workforce with those 
of investors. 

Culture 
Providing an opportunity for 
employees to participate in long-term 
value creation in the form of the SAYE 
was considered by the Group Board to 
be a positive team engagement and 
motivation tool which would align 
personal and team objectives with the 
Company’s long-term goals, and 
positively impact the Group’s culture.

Reputation 
The Group Board considered that 
attracting and retaining a high 
performing team whose long-term 
objectives were aligned with the 
Company’s overall goal of creating 
long-term shareholder value had a 
positive impact on reputation.

Long-term impact
The Group Board discussed how this 
was a key decision due to the potential 
positive impact on the long-term 
success of the Company. 

24

The Pebble Group plc  Annual Report 2021

STRATEGIC REPORTPublication of 
ESG report.

The Group Board agreed to 
publish a separate annual  
ESG report to communicate its  
ESG commitment and vision in 
a clear and transparent manner. 
In September 2021, the Group 
Board approved a formal Group 
ESG Policy and its first ESG 
report for publication, which  
is available on the Company’s 
website.

Key stakeholder groups

Our teams 
It is important that our employees 
know they work for a business that 
embraces positive and progressive 
governance and is taking proactive 
steps to address the impacts of 
climate change and to consider DEI. 
We expect the ESG demands from our 
employees to increase as we 
encourage active participation from a 
diverse and increasingly engaged 
workforce.

Our clients and Partners
Our clients and Partners, and their own 
customers, increasingly demand 
responsible, sustainable and ethical 
products and solutions. Again, we 
expect this trend to continue to grow. 
Our ESG strategy is a key differentiator 
for our Group’s businesses and will 
help us win, grow and retain clients 
and Partners. It is crucial that it is 
effectively represented by, and 
communicated to, our client base. 

Our strategic suppliers
The impact of transition to a low 
carbon economy and the continued 
focus on ESG means we must ensure 
our existing and future suppliers 
understand our ESG strategy. It is 
important that our suppliers aim to 
align with our ESG goals and 
commitments, that they prioritise and 
develop sustainable practices within 
their business and throughout their 
supply chain. 

Our shareholders and the wider 
investment community
There is significant increased focus on 
ESG in the investment community, 
driven largely by demand for sustainable 
options for investments to align with 
individuals’ ESG principles. Investors 
and analysts consistently and actively 
engage and score companies on 
corporate governance to guide their 
own stewardship activities. There is an 
intensified focus on reporting on 
sustainability, driven by social equality 
and climate risk with a need for detailed 
information on policies around climate 
risk and decarbonisation plans, ESG 
metrics and DEI. 

How Directors had regard to 
stakeholders’ interests and 
engagement output

The results of engagement with all of 
our key stakeholder groups outlined on 
pages 18-21 informed the Group Board 
that this was an important step worthy 
of investment of time and resource, 
including at Board level, to ensure and 
demonstrate the commitment and 
engagement of the Group. 

The Directors communicated the launch 
of the ESG report via the London Stock 
Exchange’s Reach service. 

How Directors had regard to 
other Section 172(1) matters

Environment and Community
The Group Board considered that a 
separate ESG report would clarify, and 
increase, the Group’s internal focus on 
its ESG agenda and drive its strategy 
with direct involvement of senior 
executives. This was considered likely 
to have a positive impact on the 
environment and our communities 
which was the fundamental underlying 
aim of our ESG agenda. 

Reputation
This tangible illustration of how the 
Company is building and looking to 
maintain a reputation for high 
standards of business conduct was 
considered to be a positive and 
accurate reflection of the Company’s 
culture. This would positively impact 
the Company’s reputation as an 
employer, with all other stakeholders 
and in our wider business community. 

Long-term impact
The decision was concluded to be of 
long-term benefit and likely to promote 
the success of the Company for the 
benefit of its shareholders as a whole.

The Pebble Group plc  Annual Report 2021

25

Sustainability 

Environmental, Social  
and Governance (ESG).

ESG is fundamental to The Pebble Group. Our operations aim to 
build on a foundation of integrity, transparency and fairness. 

One of our values:

Ambitious in our 
commitment to achieving 
positive results with 
sustainable impact.

The Group employs a Senior ESG Officer who reports to the CEO 
and is responsible for the implementation of the Group ESG 
strategy set and approved by the Group Board. Progress is 
assessed every six months at the Board’s strategy review meeting. 

Across the Group we aim to act responsibly through effective 
governance, managing our social and environmental impacts 
and risks throughout our operations and across our supply 
chains. We strive to use our influence to drive positive change 

by adopting sustainable materials and working with suppliers 
to ensure our responsibility extends across our supply chain.

To report against our strategy, we have developed our own 
bespoke ESG framework based upon four cornerstones that 
were identified as being important and relevant to our 
business and stakeholders. The framework defines the areas 
of priority and allows us to meaningfully report against the 
Group’s ESG performance. 

Our ESG Roadmap

Action

1.  Define ESG for The Pebble Group
• Four ESG cornerstones developed.

2. Create a reporting framework based on a materiality 

assessment
• A framework based around 13 material issues, subdivided into 

a further 74 topics and aligned to relevant UN Sustainable 
Development Goals.

3. 

 Identify initiatives to facilitate the achievement of 
targets over the next five years
• Initiatives to reduce energy consumption, carbon emissions, 
waste and plastic usage and to enhance social responsibility 
and ethical business practices identified. 

4.  Produce first ESG report 

• Report launched in October 2021.

5.   Report regularly on ESG achievements against 

framework and initiatives using RNS Reach or our 
website

6.   Develop a framework to facilitate the collection and 
reporting of environmental performance data across 
the Group 

7.   Regular assessment of framework, initiatives and 

targets based on stakeholder feedback and changes in 
the macro environment

Status

Defining and sharing 
our approach

The journey ahead

During 2021 we realigned and evolved our framework to reflect the areas identified from our Group-wide materiality 
analysis, linking each of these to the most relevant United Nations Sustainable Development Goals (UNSDGs). 

26

The Pebble Group plc  Annual Report 2021

STRATEGIC REPORTOur four ESG cornerstones.

Impact of our 
business on the 
environment and our 
communities
Environmental  Social  Governance

Our aim is to make a positive 
long-term difference to our 
people and the communities 
in which we work, 
while minimising our impact 
on the environment.

Diversity, health, 
well‑being and 
engagement
Environmental  Social  Governance

Our aim is to expand, 
celebrate and embrace 
individuality and diversity, 
providing a safe environment 
where we promote well-
being and a healthy work-
life balance.

Board independence, 
ethics and leadership
Social  Governance
Environmental 

Responsible 
business practices
Environmental  Social  Governance

Our aim is to promote a 
culture based upon values 
and behaviours which 
stakeholders are 
comfortable to associate 
themselves with, developing 
long-term relationships 
between the Group and its 
stakeholders.

Our aim is to protect the 
interests of our 
stakeholders by adhering to 
responsible business 
practices and embedding 
robust processes, 
procedures and safeguards 
which are effectively 
managed in our 
organisation, reducing or 
mitigating risks that the 
business faces.

ESG is incorporated into our Group’s governance framework to ensure that it is always at the centre of what we do. For 
further detail, please see the ‘ESG governance’ section on page 52 of this report. 

The Pebble Group plc  Annual Report 2021

27

Sustainability 

Materiality assessment. 

▲ Impact of our business on the environment and our communities
▲ Board independence, ethics and leadership

▲ Diversity, health, well-being and engagement
▲ Responsible business practices

▲ Human rights

s
r
e
d

l

o
h
e
k
a
t
s
o
t
e
c
n
a
t
r
o
p
m

I

High

 ▲

Packaging and waste

▲
Energy and  
climate change

Product integrity  
and transparency
▲

▲
Responsible 
sourcing

▲
Business ethics  
and integrity

▲
Economic 
performance

Data security 
and privacy
▲

▲
Governance, accountability 
and business culture

 ▲
Diversity, equity  
and inclusion

▲Employee health, safety and well-being
▲
Employee recruitment,  
retention and development

Very high

▲ Risk management

Impact on The Pebble Group’s success (over next five years)

In May 2021 we conducted our first materiality assessment to 
identify the topics that were relevant and important to our 
stakeholders and which had the largest potential to impact 
the business over the next five years. The assessment was 
internal, drawing from our teams at different levels of the 
business, and incorporating feedback from past and current 
dialogue with key stakeholders (our teams, clients and 
Partners, strategic suppliers, shareholders and the wider 
investment community).

The process consisted of a brainstorming session within the 
Group’s senior executives to identify all of the economic, 
social and environmental topics that were relevant and 
important to our business and our stakeholders. The 
assessment identified 74 relevant ESG related topics which 
were grouped into 13 different categories and aligned to one 
or more of our four ESG cornerstones. A scoring matrix was 
then developed and a cross functional management team 
scored each of the categories to rank them in terms of 
importance and impact.

28

The Pebble Group plc  Annual Report 2021

STRATEGIC REPORT 
 
Alignment with the UN 
Sustainable Development Goals.

Impact of our business on the environment and our communities

1.1

1.2

1.3

Energy and climate change 

Packaging and waste 

Responsible sourcing

Diversity, health, well-being and engagement 

2.1

Diversity, equity and inclusion

2.2

2.3

Employee health, safety and 
well-being 

Employee recruitment, 
retention and development 

Board independence, ethics and leadership 

3.1

Governance, accountability and 
business culture 

3.2

Economic performance

Responsible business practices

4.1

Business ethics and integrity 

4.2

Human rights

4.3

Product integrity and 
transparency 

4.4

Data security and privacy 

4.5

Risk management

The materiality assessment allowed us to identify and align 
each of our key material issue categories with the most 
appropriate UN sustainable development goal, demonstrating 

how we aim to contribute to the fight against inequality and 
climate change, addressing some of the world’s most pressing 
social and environmental issues.

The Pebble Group plc  Annual Report 2021

29

Sustainability 

Our commitments to each of the relevant UN SDGs

Goal

Details

Our commitment

Good Health and Well-
being.
Ensure healthy lives and 
promote well-being for all at 
all ages.

Gender Equality.
Achieve gender equality and 
empower all women and girls.

Decent Work and 
Economic Growth.
Promote inclusive and 
sustainable economic growth, 
employment and decent work 
for all.

Reduced Inequalities. 
Reduce inequality within and 
among countries.

Responsible Consumption 
and Production.
Ensure sustainable 
consumption and production 
patterns.

Climate Action.
Take urgent action to combat 
climate change and its 
impacts.

Life Below Water.
Conserve and sustainably use 
the oceans, sea and marine 
resources for sustainable 
development.

Life on Land.
Sustainably manage forests, 
combat desertification, halt 
and reverse land degradation, 
halt biodiversity loss.

Peace, Justice and Strong 
Institutions.
Promote just, peaceful and 
inclusive societies.

To promote a positive work–life balance and support the health 
and well-being of all employees.

To actively work to ensure that we have an inclusive culture across 
the Group providing equal opportunities regardless of gender.

To ensure all our employees feel safe, valued and engaged, and are 
paid at least a living wage. Ensure the same responsible business 
practices are upheld across our supply chains. 

To ensure all employees feel respected and are treated fairly and 
equally regardless of ethnicity, religious beliefs, gender, age, 
disability, sexual orientation, education and socio-economic 
background. We will also work to uphold these values throughout 
our supply chains, operating a zero tolerance approach to any form 
of intimidation, bullying, harassment, discrimination or victimisation.

Aim to ensure all the products we source, or the vendors we 
employ to source, prioritise the use of sustainable materials and 
processes.

To reduce our impact on the environment through carbon 
reduction initiatives and the employment of sustainable materials 
and optimised logistics. 

To reduce and minimise plastic and marine pollution by aiming to 
remove single use plastic packaging from our bespoke 
manufactured products.

To develop and promote products that have a reduced impact on 
the environment by identifying the origin of raw materials and 
giving priority to organic, recycled, recyclable or biodegradable 
options.

To have in place robust policies and procedures to ensure 
responsible business practices and respect for fundamental human 
rights.

30

The Pebble Group plc  Annual Report 2021

STRATEGIC REPORTPublication of our 
first ESG report.

In October 2021 we published our first standalone ESG report providing 
a detailed look at our ESG framework articulating our activity to date 
and our aspirations and targets over the next five years, with some goals 
extending to 2030. We intend to continue to produce a standalone ESG 
Report annually to demonstrate our progress in this area. Our ESG 
Report is available in the ‘About Us’ section of the Company’s website. 

Diversity, equity and inclusion (DEI) 
DEI is an important part of our long-term focus on shareholder value. We recognise how important our people are to our 
long-term success and our aim is to expand, celebrate and embrace individuality and diversity across our team. We know that 
building a diverse and inclusive culture which promotes our diverse backgrounds, skill sets and experiences will lead to a 
better business, a better place to work and, ultimately, will make the Group more valuable and effective overall. More 
information on how we are measuring and enhancing DEI throughout our Group can be found in the Group’s ESG report, and 
the report from the Nomination Committee on page 54 of the governance report. 

Task Force on Climate Related Disclosure (TCFD)
Across our Group we recognise the need to improve transparency around the climate-related risks that our organisation faces 
to help stakeholders and investors make informed decisions about our business. We have embraced the TCFD reporting 
framework and see this as an important tool in helping us understand the climate related risks and opportunities that we face 
and how we ensure these are fully integrated into our overall business strategy. In October 2021 we conducted a readiness 
review, evaluating our current practices against the 11 TCFD recommendations to ensure that any gaps were understood and 
actions are taken to allow all of the recommendations to be implemented in FY 22. 

In November 2021 we conducted our first climate related risks and opportunities assessment utilising our current risk 
assessment framework to determine our resilience, considering different climate related scenarios. The results of the 
assessment are currently being reviewed but initial findings did not identify any of the risks to have a high likelihood of 
impacting the financial performance of the business over the different climate related scenarios. Future assessments will be 
fully integrated into our risk assessment process (see page 49) and mitigating actions implemented for any risks identified even 
if not considered to have a material impact on the financial performance of the Group.

Roadmap for The Pebble Group’s introduction of TCFD reporting

Area

2021 Progress

2022 Priority

Governance

Development of a TCFD governance 
framework and reporting structure.

Review, refine and implement TCFD 
governance structure.

Strategy

Development of climate related 
scenarios and identification of climate 
related risks over the short, medium 
and long-term.

Ensure that any newly identified risks 
are considered against the Group’s 
strategy and integrated into the ESG 
framework.

Risk management

Conducted a climate related risks and 
opportunities assessment, considering 
the identified climate related scenarios.

To fully integrate the climate related 
risks and opportunities assessment 
into the risk management framework.

Metrics and targets

Initiatives and targets identified as part 
of the ESG framework and detailed in 
our ESG report.

Review and refine to ensure that any 
identified climate related risks are 
included in updated initiatives, metrics 
and targets.

The Pebble Group plc  Annual Report 2021

31

Sustainability
Our ESG progress in 2021

Our ESG progress in 2021.

Priority areas where good progress has been made:

Implementation of an energy 
reporting framework which 
allows data to be collected 
across the Group on its full 
Scope 1 and 2 emissions 
with a Scope 3 assessment 
planned in FY 22

Conducted our first gender 
pay review, which identified 
gaps and provided a 
benchmark for future annual 
reviews. Details of the 
review can be found in the 
ESG report

The Facilis Cares initiative 
supported two community 
projects

Implementation of carbon 
neutral distribution options 
for the delivery of goods to 
European clients

Continued developing 
products made from 
sustainable materials and 
giving back through 
community support projects

Approval of Group ESG 
policy

Formalised our Group DEI 
policy, building DEI principles 
into our Group Board 
appointment and succession 
planning processes. For 
further information please 
see the Nomination 
Committee update at 
page 54 of this report

Conducted DEI training 
through a third party to 
raise awareness and 
promote an inclusive 
environment for all team 
members

Full details of all of our 2021 projects and our progress can be found in our ESG report, 
which is available in the ‘About Us’ section of the Company’s website.

32

The Pebble Group plc  Annual Report 2021

STRATEGIC REPORTPriority

Our aim

UN Sustainable Development Goals

Reducing our
environmental impact

To reduce our impact on the 
environment through carbon reduction 
initiatives and the use of sustainable 
materials, alongside optimised 
logistics.

Our direct impact on the environment is relatively low, but 
we take responsibility for monitoring and reducing energy use 
and emissions. Indirectly we are responsible for a larger 
amount of greenhouse gas emissions as a result of the goods 
and services provided, predominantly through our Brand 
Addition business. 

To address our direct impact, we have set some ambitious 
internal targets of a 50% reduction in our Scope 1 and 2 emissions 
by 2030. Our efforts in 2021 focused on expanding our reporting 
framework to cover all the Group’s global sites, enabling us  
to establish a base year calculation for the Group and more 
accurately measure our Scope 1 and 2 carbon emissions.

To meet our reduction targets, we aim to procure all our 
electricity from renewable sources where we are in direct 
control of where our energy supply originates. In 2021 we 
switched two of our sites to renewable electricity. We will 

continue making other site-specific changes, investing in LED 
lighting, replacing old equipment with more energy efficient 
alternatives, and utilising carbon neutral distribution options. 
We will also invest in carbon compensation schemes, as 
appropriate, to ensure that we achieve our reduction targets.

To address our indirect impact, and as part of our roadmap, 
we have committed to undertake a full Scope 3 evaluation in 
2022, which we feel is an important step in understanding 
our indirect environmental impact. The findings from the 
evaluation will be reviewed and integrated into our Green 
House Gas (GHG) reporting, with additional targets being 
developed to monitor progress. 

In 2021, our UK energy usage was similar to 2020, with a small 
reduction of 2% in our overall carbon emissions. Our full UK 
SECR disclosure can be found on page 83 of this report.

Our climate change journey and future plans 

• ISO14001 Certification        

(Brand Addition 
Manchester)
• First Ecovadis 

assessment completed

• ISO50001 certification 
(Brand Addition EU)

• Brand Addition EU Base 

year defined
• 1% YOY energy  
reduction target

• Energy data reporting 
framework established
• 20% of sites switched 

to renewable electricity. 

• Scope 3 emissions 

evaluation.

• Expand the number of 
sites souring renewable 
energy

• Aim to launch carbon 
compensation scheme 

2004 - 2010

2016 - 2019

2021

2022

2012 - 2013

2020

2021

The Future

• Energy monitoring and 
target setting (Brand 
Addition EU)

• First CDP Disclosure 

• 27% reduction in energy 
usage compared to EU 
base year

• Defined Group 

emissions reduction 
target of 50% reduction 
of Scope 1 and Scope 2 
emissions by 2030.

• Annual energy and 
carbon reporting 
disclosures

• Expand the use of 
carbon neutral 
distribution options

The Pebble Group plc  Annual Report 2021

33

Sustainability

Priority

Our aim

UN Sustainable Development Goals

Responsible sourcing
and business practices

Strive to ensure that the products we 
source or the vendors we use prioritise 
the use of sustainable materials and 
have in place responsible business 
practices, respecting fundamental 
human rights.

Ocean Bottle
In 2021 Brand Addition worked with 
‘Ocean Bottle’. A company wholly 
focused on ocean plastic collection. 
Every Ocean Bottle sold actively funds 
the collection of 11.4kg of plastic, 
equivalent to 1,000 plastic bottles 
through supporting collectors in coastal 
communities who are able to exchange 
the plastic for things they need. 

Brand Addition introduced ‘Ocean 
Bottle’ into a number of its client stock 
ranges, helping to fund the collection of 
over 8.3 million plastic bottles, or 
94,620 kg of ocean bound plastic.

Projects using sustainable 
materials, supporting local workers
Understanding where the materials used 
in products come from is an important 
part of the buying process. When 
sourcing goods our teams are always 
looking to partner with suppliers who can 
provide transparency, and are aligned 
with our responsible sourcing strategy.

In 2021, Brand Addition collaborated 
with a client on a project to source 
48,000 t-shirts. By having a sustainable 
supply chain in place, the team was able 
to ensure that the product was 
manufactured using fair trade certified 
organic cotton, thereby supporting the 
circular economy and directly improving 
the livelihoods of 45 farming families 
in India.

Across our Group we work with a large 
array of clients, Partners and suppliers 
to fulfil their requirements for 
promotional products. With 
Facilisgroup we are connecting Partners 
with Preferred Suppliers, and through 
Brand Addition working with clients to 
design, source, and deliver, millions of 
products to support consumer and 
corporate promotions . 

Our Group has an opportunity not only 
to support our client base and ensure 
the goods they use in their promotional 
activities are sourced responsibly, but 
also to influence Preferred Suppliers to 
make changes in the way they source 
goods, helping them reduce their 
environmental impact and provide 
support for local communities.

By identifying innovative products and 
working with a responsible supply chain, 
we will see a positive impact on both 
the environment and local communities. 

We expect high standards from the 
suppliers we work with and we continue 
to evolve, and improve, our vendor 
assessment process. We also aim to 
develop and implement a Group 
framework on conduct, ethics and 
compliance, to align our approach.

34

The Pebble Group plc  Annual Report 2021

STRATEGIC REPORTPriority

Our aim

UN Sustainable Development Goals

Community support

To engage locally and make a positive 
impact, supporting our communities. 

BizDash 5K 
Brand Addition participated in the ‘St. 
Louis BizDash 5k’, a charity run through 
downtown St Louis. The BizDash 
provides an opportunity to celebrate 
our community while living a healthy, 
active lifestyle with the proceeds of the 
event donated to the St. Louis sports 
foundation, which promotes 
sportsmanship in the community and 
fosters a culture of kindness, respect, 
civility, and selflessness.

Pride 2021 
Supporting PRIDE month, showing our 
support to the diverse LGBTQ+ 
community. The Brand Addition Europe 
and U.S. teams created and sold 
t-shirts with the proceeds of $750 
benefiting Stonewall in the UK, and the 
Trevor Project in the U.S.

Faciliscares 
‘Facilis Cares’ is Facilisgroup’s initiative to 
support community projects. Its mission 
is to give back to communities through 
services and donations. The initiative is 
supported by Preferred Suppliers and 
Partners and captures the collective 
spirit of the Facilisgroup community. 

In July 2021, Facilisgroup hosted its 
Partner summit in Nashville, Tennessee. 
One of the commitments of the Facilis 
Cares initiative is to make a positive 
impact on any community they visit. 
Through the recommendations of two 
Nashville distributor Partners, Facilis 
Cares donated $12,320 to two 
organisations dedicated to helping 
youth projects. ‘Gabe’s Chemo Duck’ 
programme, which supports children 
and families living with cancer, and the 
‘Stuff the Bus’ programme which 
provides essential school supplies to 
students in need.

The Pebble Group plc  Annual Report 2021

35

Sustainability

Priority

Our aim

UN Sustainable Development Goals

Training, development
and engagement

To support ongoing development 
through training and industry 
engagement with our employees and 
stakeholders. 

Ensuring our teams receive the correct 
training is important to our long-term 
success. Our employees are key to our 
success and we must ensure they have 
the skills to perform their roles to the 
best of their abilities. All new team 
members undergo an intensive 
induction process introducing them to 
the promotional products industry to 
ensure they have a sound understanding 
of how the business operates. The 
induction process not only serves as 
training for the role but to engage new 
team members in our culture so they 
can quickly feel part of the wider team. 
Ongoing training and development 
needs are highlighted through the 
appraisal process to support employee 
growth and development.

Building and strengthening the  
Facilisgroup community
In May 2021, twelve new employees 
underwent a three-week training 
programme to provide an in depth look 
at the world of promotional products, 
distributors, suppliers, and technology, 
allowing them to have a heightened 
understanding of services and value 
provided to our Facilisgroup Partners. 

The programme consisted of a 
combination of on-site visits, classroom 
activities and virtual learning, which 
resulted in the employees receiving the 
PPAI Trained Advertising Specialist (TAS) 
certification, and beneficial knowledge 
of the promotional products industry.

Stakeholder engagement 
Engaging with clients, Partners and 
Preferred Suppliers to understand their 
needs is important to the long-term 
growth and success of our business. It 
allows us to build trust, forge long lasting 
relationships and take a pro-active 
approach to understanding their needs. 
How we engage with shareholders is 
detailed in the Stakeholder Engagement 
section on pages 18-21. 
In June, over 200 industry professionals 
met in Nashville, Tennessee, for the first 
Facilisgroup Partner Summit in two 
years dedicated to industry education, 
innovation, collaboration, and 
engagement.

The summit provided an opportunity 
for industry professionals to engage and 
share how challenges during the 
pandemic were faced, and overcome. 
The summit was themed ‘Change 
purposefully’ providing a positive 
reminder that change can be good and 
transformative. Education sessions 
focused on customer journey, 
profitability, expanded services, and 
supply chain. The Summit provided 
Partners with an opportunity to renew 
old relationships and forge new ones.

36

The Pebble Group plc  Annual Report 2021

STRATEGIC REPORTPriority

Our aim

UN Sustainable Development Goals

Health, safety and 
well-being

To provide a safe and inclusive place to 
work, promoting a positive attitude 
towards mental health and well-being.

Our Group is focused on providing a 
safe working environment for all our 
employees that promotes a healthy 
work–life balance, and supports a 
positive attitude towards mental health 
and well-being. We strongly believe that 
supporting our employees, and helping 
to ensure they are in good health, 
enables everyone to perform better. 

Each site has its own health and safety 
team who meet regularly to discuss any 
local actions or findings from risk 
assessments and health and safety 

walkarounds. In FY 21, there were no 
reportable health and safety incidents. 
Health and safety is a standing agenda 
item at each Group Board meeting 
where reports for each business are 
tabled and noted. 

In 2021, as part of our strategic 
development plan ‘ba.ONE sustainability 
and growth, individuals were recruited 
across the Brand Addition business to 
become well-being champions. Their 
role was to support colleagues with 
initiatives to promote a healthy body 

and mind and to implement new 
well-being programmes. 

The ‘ba.Well-being programme’ 
launched in mid-2021, offering nine 
subsidised benefits aimed at improving 
mental health and well-being. Since 
launching, the scheme has been very 
successful with great feedback from our 
teams. ‘ba.Support’ was also launched in 
2021 and comprises a small group of 
volunteers across the business who have 
offered to help colleagues who may 
benefit from additional support.

Aligning our approach and following recognised standards

Carbon Disclosure 
Project (CDP) 
Brand Addition makes 

an annual submission to the Carbon 
Disclosure Project (CDP) declaring its 
annual carbon emissions progress 
against its reduction targets. Its 
declaration also supports the Scope 3 
emission tracking for clients linked to 
CDP. In the most recent assessment 
Brand Addition received a ‘C’ rating.

CDP runs the global environmental 
disclosure system. CDP supports 
thousands of companies, to measure 
and manage their risks and 
opportunities on climate change, water 
security, and deforestation.

Ecovadis
Our Brand Addition 
business retained its 
Platinum status and 
improved the overall 

score from its annual EcoVadis 
assessment, which positions the 
business within the top 1% of similar 
companies in their approach to 
sustainability. The assessment reviewed 
the approach of four key areas 
(Environment, Labour & Human Rights, 
Ethics & Sustainable Procurement) and 
how the business addresses these areas 
including any actions to minimise their 
overall impact on the environment. 
EcoVadis provides an independent, 
trusted, common platform for 
evaluating and rating more than 65,000 
groups and companies across 200 
industries in 160 countries using CSR 
assessment criteria based on 
recognised sustainability standards.

ISO management systems 
Across the Group we have effective 
management systems in place that are 
annually audited by SGS to ensure 
continued certification against globally 
recognised standards. Our Brand 
Addition business holds ISO9001 across 
its UK sites, ISO14001 at its Manchester 
site and ISO50001 across its 
Manchester, London, and Hagen sites.

The Pebble Group plc  Annual Report 2021

37

Key performance indicators

Measuring our  
performance.

Group 

One of our values:

Ambitious in our commitment to 
achieving positive results with 
sustainable impact.

REVENUE

ADJUSTED EBITDA1

RETURN ON REVENUE

BASIC ADJUSTED EPS2

ADJUSTED OPERATING  
CASH FLOW CONVERSION

£115.1m

+39.7%

£15.4m

+57.1%

13.40%

+1.6%

5.14p

+73.6%

38.3%

+27.1%

m

1
.
5
1
1
£

m
4
.
2
8
£

m
4
.
5
1
£

m
8
.
9
£

%
0
4
.
3
1

%
8
.
1
1

p
4
1
.
5

p
6
9
.
2

%
0
3
.
8
3

%
0
2
.
1
1

FY20 FY21

FY20 FY21

FY20 FY21

FY20 FY21

2020 2021

Why we measure it
Year-on-year growth in 
revenue indicates 
progress against both 
short-term plans and 
long-term strategy.

Comment
The increase in revenue 
in FY 21 reflects the 
growth in Facilisgroup 
ARR and the recovery of 
Brand Addition. 

Why we measure it
Year-on-year growth in 
Adjusted EBITDA indicates 
progress against both 
short-term plans and 
long-term strategy. 
Management believes this 
adjusted measure is more 
appropriate in 
understanding the 
underlying trading 
performance of the 
business. 

Comment 
The increase in Adjusted 
EBITDA in 2021 reflects 
the revenue growth and 
the return of a normalized 
cost base. 

Why we measure it
Return on revenue, 
calculated as Adjusted 
EBITDA as a percentage of 
revenue, is an important 
measure for the Group in 
illustrating its ability to 
grow revenue profitably 
whilst maintaining control 
over its margins and 
costs. 

Comment
The Group increase of 
1.6% reflects the 
recovery of the Brand 
Addition division in FY 21. 

Why we measure it
This metric measures the 
Group’s ability to turn 
profit into cash. It is 
monitored to ensure it 
remains strong, whilst 
maintaining the level of 
investment in capital 
expenditure required to 
support the Group’s 
medium-term growth 
plans.

Comment
The improvement in the 
year is due to increased 
Group profitability with 
some investment in 
working capital to 
support sales growth in 
Brand Addition.

Why we measure it
This measure illustrates the 
profitability of the Group in 
relation to the number of 
shares in issue and is 
therefore an important 
metric in demonstrating 
the delivery of value for 
our shareholders.

Comment
Adjusted earnings per 
share is profit after tax 
before amortisation of 
acquired intangibles, 
share-based payments 
charge, and exceptional 
items divided by the 
weighted average number 
of shares in issue.
Adjusted Basic earnings per 
share were 5.14p against 
2.96p in 2020, reflecting 
the increased profitability 
of the Group.

1 Adjusted EBITDA is defined as operating profit adjusted to add back depreciation of property, plant and equipment, amortisation, share based payments charge and exceptional items

2  Basic adjusted EPS is calculated as profit after tax before amortisation of acquired intangibles, share-based payments charge, and exceptional items divided by the weighted average 

number of shares in issue

38

The Pebble Group plc  Annual Report 2021

STRATEGIC REPORT15

12

9

6

3

0

1200

1000

800

600

400

200

0

Group companies 
Facilisgroup

Recurring revenues – High visibility of recurring revenues with a growing customer base

REVENUES £’m

PARTNER NUMBERS

PARTNER BRIDGE

1.1

8.2

0.5

9.3

1.0

6.4

0.9

5.4

0.5

12.2

200

150

200

175

149

100

119

127

50

0

FY 17

FY 18 

FY 19

FY 20

FY 21

2017

2018 

2019

2020

2021

50

40

30

20

10

0

175

2020

+31

-3

-1

+6

-2

200

w
e
N

d
e
r
i
u
q
c
A

G
F
n
i
h
t
i
w

d
e
r
i
u
q
c
A

2021

n
r
u
h
C

d
e
t
c
a
r
t
n
o
C

ARR

Other

Why we measure it
Tracking recurring revenues provides 
excellent visibility of future revenue 
performance. 

Comment
Recurring revenues increased by 30% GBP 
(40% in home currency of USD) in FY 21, 
driven by the increase in Partner numbers 
and GMV growth. Recurring revenues 
comprise 96% of Facilisgroup revenues in 
FY 21, which is consistent with FY 20.

Why we measure it
Responsibly increasing Partner numbers whilst 
maintaining Partner quality is key to delivery of 
the Facilisgroup strategy. The engagement of 
existing Partners and the pipeline of potential 
new Partners are tracked on a monthly basis to 
demonstrate progress against this target.

Comment
Partners implemented, increased to 200, plus 
six awaiting implementation. This is compared 
to our milestone target of 205 Partners at the 
end of 2021.

Why we measure it
Understanding Partner attrition and the 
underlying reasons for it, is key to our 
Partner growth strategy. Alongside our 
ambitious targets for winning new Partners, 
we focus on minimising attrition. 

Comment
Retention rates have been impacted this year 
by higher levels of M&A activity within the 
Partner group. Despite this, retention rates 
remain strong at 98%. 

Partner activity – High quality Partners under long-term relationships

GROSS MERCHANDISE VALUE $’m

PREFERRED SUPPLIER PURCHASES $’m

PERCENTAGE OF PARTNERS BY GMV 
GROWTH %

1,150

821

249

768

730

638

350

261

257

227

193

350

300

250

200

150

100

50

0

FY 17

FY 18 

FY 19

FY 20

FY 21

FY 17

FY 18 

FY 19

FY 20

FY 21

Estimated PPE

Why we measure it
Tracking the value of sales processed 
through our technology sets the pricing of 
our services to our Partners and allows the 
Group to monitor both the growth in 
like-for-like Partner sales, and also overall 
growth in total distributor sales. 

Comment
The sales activity of our Partners resulted 
in $1,150m GMV, an increase of $133m on  
FY 20, and ahead of our $1.100m milestone 
target. 

Why we measure it
Consolidating Partner spend through a 
high-quality supply base that provides 
excellent service, favourable pricing and 
rebates for our Partners also generates 
revenue for Facilisgroup. The level of spend 
with our Preferred Suppliers is tracked 
monthly to demonstrate progress against 
this target. 

Comment
Spend through Preferred Suppliers increased 
in FY 21. As a percentage of GMV this was 
consistent with FY 20, lower than historically, 
driven by the swing towards PPE orders 
through non-Preferred Suppliers in Q2.

2018
2019
2020
2021

70%

60%

50%

40%

30%

20%

10%

0%
>-30% -11%  to 

-30%

-10% to 
+10%

+11% to 
+30%

>+30%

Why we measure it
Understanding the sales performance of our 
Partners is an indication of our Partner’s 
strength. 

Comment
The impact of the pandemic on Partner GMV 
growth was evident in FY 20 and subsequent 
recovery in FY 21, is evident in the unusual 
spreads seen across those years.

The Pebble Group plc  Annual Report 2021

39

 
Key performance indicators

Group companies 
Brand Addition

Revenue analysis – Win, Grow, Retain, Repeat 

REVENUE BY SERVICE TO 
CLIENTS £’m

67

69

44

25

29

29

56

46

120

100

80

60

40

20

0

120

100

80

60

40

20

0

REVENUE BY EXISTING AND 
NEW CLIENTS £’m

3

95

12

80

11

91

5

68

REVENUE BY CLIENT 
CONCENTRATION £’m

32

14

46

33

14

51

20

10

43

17
12

73

120

100

80

60

40

20

0

FY 18

FY 19

FY 20

FY 21

FY 18

FY 19

FY 20

FY 21

FY 18

FY 19

FY 20

FY 21

Consumer Promotions 

Corporate Programmes

Existing clients

New clients (in year and 1st full year contribution)

Top 10 clients  

11-20 clients

21+ clients

Why we measure it
Brand Addition revenues can be 
categorised into two distinct divisions; 
Consumer Promotions that support our 
clients in driving their own sales targets, and 
Corporate Programmes that support our 
clients’ general marketing activities. These 
divisions can respond differently to market 
conditions and therefore analysing the 
revenue split is important. 

Comment
Revenue increased during FY 21 across both 
divisions. Consumer Promotions increase 
driven by incremental activity across key 
clients. Corporate Programmes growth 
reflects some post pandemic recovery of 
existing clients combined with new client wins.

Why we measure it
Brand Addition has excellent levels of client 
retention providing the business with good 
visibility of revenues and informs the view 
of future performance. Retaining and 
growing existing clients, while successfully 
implementing new business is fundamental 
to its growth strategy.

Comment
Growth in revenue from existing clients 
represents recovery in underlying Corporate 
Programme clients combined with the 
incremental Consumer Promotions activity.  
FY 21 was also a strong year for new business, 
including significant new corporate clients 
contracted in FY 20 and fully implemented 
through FY 21.

Why we measure it
Brand Addition tracks revenue by client 
concentration as continued success of these 
larger clients is central to delivering on our 
strategy of Win, Grow, Retain, Repeat.

Comment
The top 10 clients contributed 71.6% of 
total revenue in FY 21 (58.9% in FY 20). Our 
focus on attracting and growing global 
contracts, combined with slower post 
pandemic recovery in some of our smaller 
clients, has led to our top 10 clients growing 
as a percentage of overall revenues.

Revenue diversity – Strong sectors across multiple geographies

REVENUE BY CLIENT SECTOR %

REVENUE BY DESTINATION %

4%

8%

8%

11%

9%

11%

22%

20%

FY21

FY20

15%

15%

35%

42%

Engineering

Financial Services

Health, Beauty, FMCG

Technology

Transport

Other

16%

12%

20% 23%

FY21

FY20

26%

31%

34%

38%

UK 

Europe 

US 

RoW

Why we measure it
Brand Addition works with clients across a wide range of sectors. 
This level of diversity provides protection against economic or 
regulatory factors which may impact specific sectors.

Comment
Clients in the health and beauty sector contributed 42% of revenue 
in FY 21 (35% in FY 20). These clients operate in the Consumer 
Promotions division and have contributed significantly to the growth 
of this division. There was strong diversity across other sectors.

Why we measure it
Brand Addition has a global client base and is well diversified across 
the world, providing resilience to market conditions that could 
affect specific geographies. 

Comment
Sales into Europe increased relative to FY 20, driven by recovery of 
Corporate Programme clients and significant new clients operating 
predominantly in Europe. 

40

The Pebble Group plc  Annual Report 2021

STRATEGIC REPORTChief Financial Officer’s review 

£’m 

Revenue 

Adjusted EBITDA 

Adjusted operating cash flow 

Net cash

FY 21

FY 20

Variance 

115.1

15.4

5.9

12.1

82.4

9.8

1.1

7.1

32.7

5.6

4.8

5.0

2.18p

Adjusted Earnings Per Share

5.14p

2.96p

Overview
The results reflect a successful year for the Group where 
the objectives set at the outset for both our businesses 
have been met.  Revenue of £115.1m (FY 20: £82.4m) was 
40% ahead of FY 20 and Adjusted EBITDA of £15.4m  
(FY 20: £9.8m) was 57% ahead. 

Taking each of the businesses in turn:

In March 2021, Facilisgroup set out a medium-term aspiration 
targeting USD50m of ARR by the end of 2024. This plan included 
short-term milestones signposting the route to delivering this 
aspiration, which it successfully met in FY 21. In the year it 
continued to grow both revenue and EBITDA, increased Partner 
numbers to 200 (FY 20: 175), and, through providing additional 
services to preferred suppliers, increased the level of supplier 
contributions. In the year, total revenue increased 30% in GBP, 
40% in Facilisgroup’s home currency of USD.

Brand Addition’s revenue was 41% ahead of the prior year, and 
importantly 5% ahead of FY 19, representing a full and 
complete recovery ahead of pre-pandemic levels.  Sales in our 
Consumer Promotions division grew strongly in the year up 
62% over FY 20, supported by improving momentum, and a 
positive contribution from new business in the Corporate 
Programmes division, where sales increased 28% over FY 20. 
We expect this momentum to continue in FY 22 with a further 
positive contribution from additional new business wins 
converted during FY 21.

The Group’s balance sheet remains strong and its liquidity 
position is robust with cash balances of £8.5m at 21 March 
2022 with no amounts drawn down on the Company’s £10m 
committed revolving credit facility. 

Review of the business
The Group chooses to use adjusted measures as key 
performance indicators in addition to those reported under 
IFRS, as they reflect the underlying performance of the 
business. These adjusted measures exclude certain  
non-operational and exceptional items, which have been 
consistently applied in all years presented. The information 
presented below should also be considered in conjunction 
with the segmental analysis in the Chief Executive’s Review and 
note 4, which provide further detail on the performance of 
the separate businesses within the Group.

The Pebble Group plc  Annual Report 2021

41

Chief Financial Officer’s review

Gross profit
Gross profit as a percentage of turnover reduced during the 
year by 1.1 p.p.t from 37.6% to 36.5%. This largely reflects 
the impact of the increased weighting of Brand Addition 
sales as a proportion of the total Group, as revenue 
recovered from the sales impact of FY 20. In Brand 
Addition, there was also a 0.7 p.p.t reduction in margin as 
the business navigated a period of increased costs 
associated with Brexit, freight rate pricing, and freight 
capacity challenges combined with the impact, in the short 
term, of new business, which has lower than average initial 
margins.

Adjusted EBITDA 
Adjusted EBITDA was £15.4m (FY 20: £9.8m). The increase of 
£5.6m from FY 20 is made up as follows:
• Facilisgroup £1.6m as incremental revenues were delivered 

at excellent EBITDA returns of 60% (FY 20: 61%) 
demonstrating the business’ ability to retain strong margins 
and scale revenue.

• Brand Addition delivered a £4.7m increase being the 

incremental profit from sales growth less increased costs 
as contributions from the UK Job Retention Scheme, and 
support from our teams through temporary salary 
reductions, were not repeated in 2021.

• Central costs increased by £0.7m in the year. £0.2m from 

temporary salary savings in FY 20, the balance being 
incremental costs through the growth of the team and the 
Group’s investment in ESG.

The Adjusted EBITDA margin increased by 1.5 p.p.t to 13.4% 
as revenues in Brand Addition recovered from the demand 
challenges of 2020.

Depreciation and amortisation
The total charge in the year was £4.8m (FY 20: £3.5m), of 
which £2.8m (FY 20: £2.0m) related to the amortisation of 
intangible assets. In accordance with IAS 38, the Group 
capitalises the costs incurred in the development of its 
software, and the increase in the year is a result of the 
Group’s continued investment in its proprietary technology, 
and specifically in new product development for 
Facilisgroup. It is the Group’s intention to continue this 
investment and it is expected that this charge will increase 
further in FY 22.

£’m

Revenue

Gross profit

Gross profit margin

Adjusted EBITDA

2021

115.1

42.0

36.5%

15.4

Adjusted EBITDA margin

13.4%

2020

82.4

31.0

37.6%

9.8

11.9%

(3.5)

-

(0.6)

5.7

(0.7)

5.0

(0.9)

4.1

(4.8)

(0.7)

-

9.9

(0.6)

9.3

(2.0)

7.3

167,450,893 167,450,893
2.96p

5.14p

4.39p

2.44p

Variance

32.7

11.0

(1.1%)

5.6

1.5%

(1.3)

(0.7)

0.6

4.2

0.1

4.3

(1.1)

3.2

-

2.18p

1.95p

Depreciation and 
amortisation
Share-based  
payment charge

Exceptional items

Operating profit

Net finance costs

Profit before tax

Tax

Profit for the year

Weighted average 
number of shares

Adjusted Basic EPS

Basic EPS

Revenue
Revenue for FY 21 was £115.1m (FY 20: £82.4m), growth of 
40%. Facilisgroup total revenue increased by £2.9m or 30% 
(FY 20: £0.5m or 5%).  ARR from partner subscriptions for 
our technology and supplier contributions made up £2.9m 
of this increase. The growth arose from a combination of 
incremental partner numbers, and additional contributions 
from suppliers, both from increased volumes as purchasing 
patterns normalised, and increased percentage 
contributions as suppliers paid more for the additional 
efficiencies delivered to them by Facilisgroup.  Revenue in 
Brand Addition increased by £29.8m. A combination of 
strong growth with key customers in the Consumer 
Promotions division of £17.7m, incremental new business 
delivering £8.0m, and the balance being the recovery of the 
underlying Corporate Programs business that was affected 
by demand challenges in 2020. 

42

The Pebble Group plc  Annual Report 2021

STRATEGIC REPORTExceptional items
Exceptional costs in the year were £nil (FY 20: £0.6m). 
Costs in FY 20 comprised £0.4m reorganisation and 
restructuring in Brand Addition, as changes were made to 
headcount to align people numbers with anticipated sales 
volumes following the impact of the pandemic, and £0.2m 
transaction costs relating to the acquisition of software 
assets in Facilisgroup. 

Share based payments
The total charge for the Period under IFRS 2 “Share-based 
payments” was £0.7m (FY 20: nil). This charge related to the 
2020 and 2021 awards made under the 2019 Long Term 
Incentive Plan and Group Sharesave Plan (SAYE).

Operating profit
Operating profit for the year was £9.9m (FY 20: £5.7m).

Finance costs
Finance costs of £0.6m in the year (FY 20: £0.7m) include 
interest on the utilisation of the Group’s committed RCF 
facility during the year of £0.2m (FY 20: £0.3m) and interest 
costs on leases capitalised in accordance with IFRS 16 of 
£0.4m (FY 20: £0.4m). 

Taxation
The total taxation charge was £2.0m (FY 20: £0.9m) giving 
rise to an effective rate of tax of 21.5% (FY 20: 18.0%). The 
effective rate of tax was higher than the UK standard rate of 
taxation as the proportion of profit earned by the Group in 
overseas jurisdictions where corporation tax rates are 
higher than those in the UK increased during the year.

Basic Earnings per share
The earnings per share analysis in note 6 covers both adjusted 
earnings per share (profit after tax before amortisation of 
acquired intangibles, share-based payments charge and 
exceptional items divided by the weighted average number of 
shares in issue during the year), and statutory earnings per 
share (profit attributable to equity holders divided by the 
weighted average number of shares in issue during the year). 
Adjusted earnings was £8.6m (FY 20: £5.0m) an increase in 
adjusted basic earnings per share of 2.18 pence. Basic earnings 
per share was 4.39 pence per share (FY 20: 2.44 pence per 
share) an increase of 1.95 pence. 

Dividends 
On admission to AIM in December 2019, the Group’s stated 
intention was to make dividend payments of c.30% of profit 
after tax. This policy remains in place. However, as we 
believe the opportunities ahead of us are significant, 
particularly investment in Facilisgroup, we have taken the 

decision to retain cash in the business and not to pay a 
dividend in respect of 2021. The timing of implementing our 
stated dividend policy will be considered again during 2022, 
and an update provided in the Group’s half year results, 
scheduled for announcement in September 2022.

Cash flow
The Group had a cash balance of £12.1m at 31 December 
2021 (FY 20: £7.1m). 

Cash flow for the year is set out below.

£’m

Adjusted EBITDA

Movement in working capital 

Capital expenditure 

Leases

Adjusted operating cash flow

Tax paid

Net finance cash flows

Exceptional items

Exchange loss

Net cash flow

2021

15.4

(2.8)

(5.3)

(1.4)

5.9

(0.5)

(0.6)

-

0.2

5.0

2020

Variance

9.8

(1.8)

(5.7)

(1.2)

1.1

(1.3)

(0.7)

(0.5)

(0.4)

(1.8)

5.6

(1.0)

0.4

(0.2)

4.8

0.8

0.1

0.5

0.6

6.8

Adjusted operating cash flow 
Adjusted operating cash flow before tax payments and net 
finance costs increased by £4.8m in the year to £5.9m. This 
is an important metric for the Group that is monitored 
consistently to ensure it remains strong whilst maintaining 
the necessary level of investment in capital expenditure 
required to support the Group’s medium-term growth 
plans.  The improvement in the year is due to increased 
Group profitability with some investment in working capital 
to support sales growth in Brand Addition. 

Balance Sheet and shareholders’ funds
Net assets increased in the year by £8.3m, the balance 
sheet is summarised below:

£’m

Non-current assets

Working capital

Cash

Lease liabilities

Other net liabilities

Net assets

2021

63.9

9.5

12.1

(7.8)

(3.1)

74.6

2020

63.6

6.4

7.1

(9.0)

(1.8)

66.3

Variance

0.3

3.1

5.0

1.2

(1.3)

8.3

The Pebble Group plc  Annual Report 2021

43

Chief Financial Officer’s review

Alternative Performance Measures “APM’s”
Throughout the Annual Report and Accounts the Group has 
used a number of APM’s. These are used to provide 
additional clarity to the Group’s financial performance and 
are used internally by management to monitor business 
performance, in its budgeting and forecasting and also for 
determination of Directors’ and senior management 
remuneration. These APM’s are not defined under IFRS and, 
therefore, may not be directly comparable with adjusted 
measures presented by other companies. The non-GAAP 
measures are not intended to be a substitute for or 
superior to any IFRS measures of performance. However, 
they are considered by management to be important 
measures used in the business for assessing performance. 

The following are key non-GAAP measures identified by the 
Group and used in the Strategic Review and Financial 
Statements:
Adjusted EBITDA which means operating profit before 
depreciation, amortisation, share-based payments charge 
and exceptional items.
Adjusted operating profit which means operating profit 
before amortisation of acquired intangible assets, share-
based payments charge and exceptional items.
Adjusted profit before tax which means profit before tax, 
amortisation of acquired intangible assets, share-based 
payments charge and exceptional items.
Adjusted Earnings which means profit after tax before 
amortisation of acquired intangible assets, share-based 
payments charge and exceptional items.
Adjusted earnings per share which means Adjusted Earnings 
divided by a weighted average number of shares in issue.
Adjusted operating cash flow which is calculated as 
Adjusted EBITDA less movements in working capital, capital 
expenditure and lease payments.

Claire Thomson
Chief Financial Officer
22 March 2022

Non-current assets 
Non-current assets are the most significant balance sheet 
category of which £35.8m (FY 20: £35.8m) is goodwill arising 
on previous acquisitions. Non-current assets also include 
£8.6m (FY 20: £9.0m) of customer relationship intangible 
assets, £11.3m (FY 20: £9.2m) of software development costs, 
including £3.3m investment in the year into Facilisgroup 
technology products and £7.9m (FY 20: £9.1m) of Property, 
Plant and Equipment. Software development costs arise from 
ongoing investment in Group proprietary software and in 
particular investment into Facilisgroup products to ensure 
that existing technology services remain market leading and 
differentiated from our competitors alongside the 
development of new products that will deliver our medium-
term growth plans. The costs are capitalised in accordance 
with IAS 38 and amortised over the period which the Group 
expects to generate benefit from the development. As the 
Group continues to accelerate investment into its digital 
commerce platform for Facilisgroup, we expect this level of 
investment to continue in the short term.

Working capital
Working capital of £9.5m is £3.1m higher than FY 20. This 
increase is due to sales growth, and incremental volume in 
Brand Addition where trade receivables have increased over 
FY 20. The quality of these receivables remains excellent and 
our working capital metrics remain consistent with FY 20 with 
amounts outstanding being collected to terms in Q1 22.

Cash
Cash balances at 31 December 2021 were £12.1m an increase 
of £5.0m on 2020.

Lease liabilities
Lease liabilities of £7.8m (2019: £9.0m) relate to Group 
properties capitalised in accordance with IFRS 16. The 
reduction in the year is lease payments of £1.4m offset by 
£0.5m additions arising on lease extensions for existing 
offices and the relocation of Brand Addition Shanghai.

Other net liabilities 
Other net liabilities of £3.1m (FY 20: £1.8m) are net tax 
liabilities of which £3.0m (FY 20: £2.6m) is deferred tax in 
respect of the intangible assets of Facilisgroup. £1.6m  
(FY 20: £1.7m) relates to acquired customer relationships,  
the balance and increase in the year arising as a result of 
accelerated investments into technology products. These 
liabilities will reverse over the period that the assets are 
amortised. In FY 20 the balance also included £0.8m of 
recoverable tax payments on account.

44

The Pebble Group plc  Annual Report 2021

STRATEGIC REPORTRisk Management

Managing our key  
risks and uncertainties.

One of our values:

Enjoying the journey in a culture 
of integrity, transparency and 
fairness, where we are proud of 
our past and excited by our 
future.

The Group Board is ultimately responsible for 
setting and approving risk appetite and ensuring 
that the Group maintains a sound risk 
management and internal control framework.

Risk management and internal control 
framework
The Audit Committee
The Group Board delegates responsibility to the Audit 
Committee to discuss and review the Group’s risk profile 
and risk register twice per year. The Committee looks at the 
nature and extent of principal risks and uncertainties faced 
by the Group in the context of achieving its strategic 
objectives and ensures that all have been appropriately 
identified. The Committee also reviews the mitigating 
actions and controls in place in respect of these risks and 
any related opportunities. At these meetings, the Audit 
Committee also carries out a review of internal controls and 
receives reports from the Group’s management on the 
effectiveness and integrity of the Group’s internal control 
and risk management systems. The Audit Committee is also 
kept up to date by the Group CFO and the Group Financial 
Controller on progress against the Group’s internal audit 
and risk plan and, on an annual basis, it considers whether 
there is a need for a separate internal audit function. When 
satisfied, the Audit Committee approves the Group’s risk 
register and internal controls and recommends to the 
Group Board for approval.

Group Executive Committee and Operating Boards
Risk monitoring and identification is an ongoing iterative 
process to facilitate the early identification and escalation 
of risks and the Group has strong governance and 
communication structures in place which ensure risks are 
actively managed and mitigated. 

The Group Executive Committee includes ‘Risk Management 
and Compliance’ as a monthly standing agenda item for 
discussion between the Executive Directors, the Divisional 
Leads of each of Facilisgroup and Brand Addition and the 
other senior executives on the Committee. This includes 
escalation by the Divisional Leads of any risks or potential 
risks that have occurred since the previous meeting and 
discussion and review of any required amendments to 
internal controls. Risk and compliance related policies and 
procedures are also reviewed and discussed in that forum 
prior to presentation to the Audit Committee and/or Group 
Board for annual approval. 

The Operating Boards of Facilisgroup and Brand Addition 
meet monthly and maintain their own risk registers which 
are reviewed and reconciled against the Group’s risk 
register twice per year in advance of review by the Audit 
Committee, as described above. Risk management has 
always formed part of Operating Board meetings, however 
in 2022 ‘Risk Management’ has become a formal standing 
agenda item at each Operating Board meeting, where the 
lead for each key function addresses the significant risks 
relevant to their areas, including potential horizon risks and 
those identified below.

Through this risk management framework, the Group Board 
drives effective risk management practices and processes 
that in turn drive effective decision-making at all levels of 
the Group:

Risk Management Framework

Group Board

Audit  
Committee

Group Executive Committee

Operating Board 
FacilisGroup

Operating Board 
Brand Addition

Risk and Compliance

Operating Risk Register

Group Risk Register

The Pebble Group plc  Annual Report 2021

45

Risk Management

Evolution of the risk management framework
Across the Group we continue to review and evolve our risk 
management framework to ensure it reflects best practice. 
In Q1 22, we sought external support and advice to validate 
the Group’s risk register approach and we have taken steps 
to implement the recommendations made, which include 
making a clearer distinction between controls and action 
plans in our risk mitigation reporting and the introduction of 
formal risk horizon scanning.

We have also taken initial steps to evolve our framework to 
align with the Task Force on Climate-related Financial 
Disclosure (TCFD) reporting requirements and we plan to 

incorporate the TCFD recommendations during 2022.  
These include the evaluation of physical and transitional 
climate related risks over the short, medium and long-term, 
considering different climate related scenarios. Further 
information can be found on page 31 in the ESG section of 
this report. 

Key risks
The items referred to below are regarded as the key risks 
for the Group. These are not the only risks that could affect 
Group performance but, in the opinion of the Group Board, 
are those which are currently the most significant and 
specific to the Group’s business. 

Market risks
Risk and potential impacts

Mitigating activities

Pandemic related disruption
Due to a variety of external factors including a 
successful global vaccine rollout, easing of 
Government restrictions, improved customer 
confidence and improved wider trading conditions, 
the impact of the COVID-19 pandemic on the Brand 
Addition business was reduced in 2021.

Nevertheless, in the longer term, the Group must 
continue to be prepared for the potential impact of 
any new pandemic outbreaks. These factors pose a 
risk to demand for the Group’s products and 
services, which could impact its ability to meet 
revenue and Adjusted EBITDA targets. 

The Group took swift action during 2020 in response to the 
pandemic, managing its flexible cost base to remain profitable and 
cash generative. 

In 2021, the Group’s differentiated positions in the industry and 
established client and Partner relationships enabled it to deliver an 
immediate return to growth post the impact of pandemic disruption.

The strength and robustness of the growing Facilisgroup 
subscription based technology platform continued during the year. 
Added to this, at Brand Addition there was a full and immediate 
return to 2019 sales levels from its strong client base that is 
diverse, both geographically and from a sector perspective.

The Group has a strong balance sheet, effective working capital 
disciplines, is cash generative and has access to a £10m revolving 
credit facility. Having successfully navigated through this difficult 
period, the Group Board is confident in the Group’s ability to deal 
with any continued disruptions from COVID-19 and in the  
long-term prospects for the business. 

Change to risk
No change

Macroeconomic environment
The ongoing impact of the pandemic on the 
macroeconomic environment, including demand and 
supply chain disruption, continues to pose a risk of a 
global economic downturn. Such downturn could 
impact on demand for the Group’s products and 
services and on Brand Addition’s gross margins, 
thereby affecting the Group’s ability to meet its 
revenue and EBITDA targets. 

However, in assessing this risk, we must consider the 
current conflict in Ukraine and the resulting sanctions 
imposed on Russia by governments worldwide. These 
circumstances heighten the risk of a global economic 
downturn and we have increased our assessment of 
this risk accordingly.

The Group has proved its ability to maintain profitability and cash 
generation from reduced demand caused by the COVID-19 pandemic. 

In the event of an economic downturn, the subscription-based 
technology platform in Facilisgroup insulates this business from any 
initial shock, and revenues in the year of impact would be largely 
unaffected. The diversification of Brand Addition revenues across 
geographies and sectors provides some protection against the impact 
of a reduction in demand and the flexibility of the operating model 
below gross margin gives the business the ability to protect profits. 
Both businesses are highly cash generative with the underlying client 
base in Brand Addition resulting in a high-quality balance sheet.

Change to risk
Increased

46

The Pebble Group plc  Annual Report 2021

STRATEGIC REPORTStrategic
Risk and potential impacts

Mitigating activities

Concentrated client base
Brand Addition’s core strategy is to win, grow, and retain 
multi-country out-sourced contracts, as further detailed in 
on page 17 of this report.

However, Brand Addition has a relatively small number of key 
clients and in FY 21 generated 71.6% of Group revenue from the 
top 10 clients. A loss, or significant reduction, in activity from 
one of our major clients could materially affect the Group’s 
ability to meet its revenue and Adjusted EBITDA targets.

Acquisition risk
As further detailed in page 17 of this report, the Group’s core 
strategy is to selectively pursue acquisition opportunities to 
create excellent shareholder value and to support its organic 
growth and development in the long-term.

The Group has a track record of achieving growth through 
acquisition. However, any future acquisition could give rise 
to unforeseen risks for the Group, such as loss of key clients 
or key personnel, complex and extended integration 
processes absorbing significant amounts of senior 
management time or unforeseen liabilities. A poorly 
implemented acquisition could have a damaging impact on 
the Group’s financial position and reputation. 

The acquisition of Facilisgroup in December 2018, which 
has a diversified customer base and in FY 21 represented 
57% of Group Adjusted EBITDA, means that the impact of 
the loss of a key Brand Addition client on Group Adjusted 
EBITDA is much reduced. 

In addition, delivering on the strategic objective of the Brand 
Addition business to grow through new client acquisition 
means the Group Adjusted EBITDA impact of any one client 
would be further diluted.

Change to risk 
No change

The Group takes great care in identifying potential 
acquisition targets, which are typically businesses with 
whom senior management have an existing relationship. 

All proposed acquisition targets are subject to robust 
due diligence using internal teams with extensive industry 
experience, supported by external advisors where the 
Group does not have the specialist in-house skills. 

Change to risk
No change

Financial
Risk and potential impacts

Mitigating activities

Currency and foreign exchange
Facilisgroup provides its technology to SME distributors in 
North America and Brand Addition services multi-country 
out-sourced contracts with leading brands.

A proportion of the Group’s revenue is therefore 
denominated in foreign currency, principally US Dollar and 
Euro, while the Group’s reporting currency is pound sterling. 
The Group is, therefore, exposed to the risk that adverse 
exchange rate movements could cause its costs to increase 
(relative to its reporting currency) and could result in 
reduced profitability.  

Where it is considered appropriate, the Group uses 
hedges to reduce exposure to currency risk, however 
these may not always be effective and there may be 
some residual currency risk.

Change to risk
No change

The Pebble Group plc  Annual Report 2021

47

Risk Management

Operational
Risk and potential impacts

Mitigating activities

Retaining and attracting key personnel
Attracting and retaining experienced and appropriately skilled 
personnel is critical to achieving our organic growth plans (set 
out on page 17 of this report). 

Not having the right people and skills within the business 
could impact on the Group’s ability to service our clients and 
grow the business.

We value our people highly, invest across our Group in their 
development and support them in achieving their potential. 

We continually develop and invest in our highly talented 
and dedicated people in order to maintain an engaged 
workforce, as explained further in the Stakeholder 
Engagement section of this report on pages 18-21.

Inflationary pressures on salaries across the globe, combined 
with a shortage of skilled personnel in the labour market, 
means higher wage expectations amongst existing and 
future personnel.

We offer competitive compensation packages that are 
reviewed regularly and we routinely survey our 
employees to monitor employee engagement levels  
and identify opportunities for further improvement.

Attrition rates across sites and geographies are 
monitored monthly to enable mitigating actions to be 
taken quickly if necessary.

Change to risk
Increased

Reliance on IT systems
The Group’s activities are reliant on the effective operation 
of its IT platforms and infrastructure. In the event of an 
incident, the Group would initiate its business continuity 
and disaster recovery procedures. However, prolonged 
disruption could impact the Group’s ability to hit revenue 
and EBITDA targets.

The Group has an experienced and dedicated IT team 
with support from external consultants where necessary. 
Disaster recovery and business continuity procedures are 
monitored and updated regularly by both the IT and 
operations teams.

Change to risk
No change

Breach of IT security or cyber-attack 
IT Security breaches, computer malware and other  
cyber-attacks could result in a loss of business for the Group. 
Such incidents may give rise to a potential liability through 
litigation and damage the Group’s reputation with clients, 
resulting in a loss of goodwill.
Generally, reported incidences of cyber-attacks targeted at 
businesses are becoming more frequent and of greater scale 
and sophistication.

The Group implements a robust testing process on 
systems and software that includes external penetration 
testing by software consultants. Disaster recovery plans 
have been developed to respond to such incidents to 
ensure the business is able to recover with limited 
interruption should an incident arise.

The Group has crisis management procedures in place to 
help us deal with any IT security incident efficiently.

Change to risk
Increased

48

The Pebble Group plc  Annual Report 2021

STRATEGIC REPORTOperational
Risk and potential impacts

Mitigating activities

Climate change 
Climate change presents a range of risks to the 
business.

Risks of extreme weather events such as floods, 
droughts and storms could potentially affect the 
Group’s infrastructure and operations and also that 
of its supply chain. The transition to a low-carbon 
economy could also impact the Group’s supply chain 
and it may be exposed to increased operational and 
distribution costs related to mitigation efforts, 
increased regulatory compliance and carbon taxes. 

It may also face increased product costs from 
suppliers due to higher input costs and regulatory 
compliance. 

Customer preferences and concerns will increase 
demand for wider ranges of low-carbon, sustainable 
products, services and delivery options that may be 
difficult to identify, source and arrange. This could 
negatively impact customer demand, retention and 
the Group’s revenues. In addition, the increasing 
demand of all stakeholders to undertake meaningful 
activity to address climate change is likely to result in 
increased exposure to the risk of reputational 
damage, and client and employee retention issues, if 
the Group is not perceived to be engaging effectively 
with this challenge. 

These risks are further analysed in our annual ESG 
report, which is on the Company’s website.

The Group is committed to addressing meaningfully the challenges 
we all face in tackling climate change. 

One of our four ESG pillars specifically focuses on minimising our 
impact on the environment and supporting the fight to tackle climate 
change. Our actions and commitments are set out in the ESG section 
of this report on pages 26-37 and also in our annual ESG report, 
which is on the Company’s website. 

Whilst climate change does not pose a significant risk to our 
business, we recognise our duty to minimise our impact and the 
importance of climate change to our key stakeholder groups (as 
referred in our Section 172(1) statement on pages 22-25). 

Clients supported by Brand Addition in particular have been demanding 
sustainable products for a number of years. The business has embraced 
and welcomed this change, using its creative team, established and 
emerging supply chains to source products that meet the high standards 
expected by our clients and their own commitments to ESG. This is a key 
area of differentiation for the business and we are actively developing our 
offering and services to meet increasing ESG standards. 

The risk of supply chain disruption is minimised through the Group’s 
diverse supply chain so that it can quickly adapt. The Group also 
maintains alternative supplier relationships for each key product 
category. In addition, through the Brand Addition direct supply 
chain, where the supplier evaluation process identifies a heightened 
risk of disruption due to natural disasters and/or political or social 
unrest, then an alternative supplier would be identified where the 
level of risk was considered more acceptable. 

Addressing the challenge of reducing our carbon emissions, the 
Group has developed a framework for energy and carbon reporting 
to provide visibility of our direct Scope 1 and 2 emissions globally, and 
is embarking on an exercise in 2022 to calculate its indirect (Scope 3) 
emissions. Targets have been set and further reduction plans are 
currently being developed, along with utilising carbon compensation 
schemes, to reduce carbon emissions. One of the projects already 
underway has seen our Brand Addition logistics team working with key 
logistics partners to identify carbon neutral distribution opportunities 
to provide our clients with these alternatives when selecting delivery 
options for their goods.

Change to risk
No change

The Strategic Report, which includes the Chair’s report, the CEO’s review, the business model and strategy, the Group 
financial review and the principal risks and uncertainties, was approved by the Group Board and signed on its behalf by:

Christopher Lee
CEO 
22 March 2022

The Pebble Group plc  Annual Report 2021

49

Chair’s Introduction to Governance

Committed to effective 
corporate governance.

The Group Board is committed to effective 
corporate governance. We see the principles of 
good governance not just as a set of guidelines, 
but as a real basis for making us a better business 
with strong internal controls that deliver long-
term value and meets stakeholder expectations 
around leadership and oversight. As Chair of the 
Group Board, I am responsible for corporate 
governance within the Group, and I work with 
our Board and Group General Counsel & 
Company Secretary to build upon and enhance 
our sound corporate governance grounding. 
This involves reviewing the continued effective operation of 
the Group Board and its Committees and their oversight of 
the Group’s businesses, updating our governance framework 
and our approach where necessary or desirable in response 
to: (i) changes in our businesses as we grow; (ii) changes in 
official standards; (iii) developments in best practice 
guidance; and (iv) our stakeholders’ expectations. 

In doing this, we are focused on ensuring that the new 
policies or practices we introduce are not only aligned with 
best practice but are designed in a meaningful way to fit 
with our culture and way of working. During 2021, this 
included Board time dedicated to: developing or formalising 
Group policies and Board processes; reviewing the quality 
of contribution, debate and decision-making at Board and 
Committee meetings; developing or formalising the 
Company’s approach to, and processes around, specific 
governance initiatives (for example DEI, succession planning 
and talent pipeline development); reviewing Board and 
Committee terms of reference; and, enhancing the 
reporting and flow of information from Facilisgroup and 
Brand Addition up to the Group Board through the 
appropriate forums. 

Governance Highlights 
• Further development of Group policies
• Introduction of formal DEI policy and 

initiatives

• Strengthening of formal succession 

planning, Board appointment process and 
talent pipeline management

• Enhanced reporting and flow of 

governance information

• External validation of approach to risk 

monitoring and assessment

• Preliminary alignment with TCFD

One of our values:

Learning and growing knowing 
there is always progress to be 
made.

50

CORPORATE GOVERNANCEThe Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021Our Group Board members have extensive experience and 
are professionally active in roles other than at The Pebble 
Group. They are provided with a monthly ‘Boardroom 
Briefing’ covering a range of corporate governance issues, 
such as: reports on corporate culture; recent cases on 
directors and their responsibilities; and updates on 
executive remuneration, ESG or climate related issues and 
disclosure requirements. The Group Board is also given the 
opportunity to keep in touch with relevant developments 
through appropriate seminars and formal external training 
courses to ensure the continued development of 
knowledge, skill and capability. Fostering a culture of 
continuous improvement is important to me and I will lead 
in personal development though my own participation in 
training and continued professional development. 

In the year, the Group formalised and published its values, 
included in which is our corporate governance strategy 
centred around ensuring that our operations are conducted 
with integrity, transparency and fairness.

We are proud of the work we have done to enhance our 
governance and risk management processes and our 
commitment to continuing to evolve these brings 
excitement for our future. You can find more about our 
values on the inside front cover.

As a Board we aim to lead by example, be authentic, 
embrace our values and create an open and honest 
environment, because we believe this establishes and 
evolves effective risk management and effective decision-
making at all levels of our organisation. The Group Board 
sees this as a key differentiator and has observed how this 
serves to build trust with our clients and suppliers and 
allows us to retain high-performing staff. 

In adhering to these principles, the Company has applied 
the Corporate Governance Code for Small and Mid-Size 
Quoted Companies 2018 published by the Quoted 
Companies Alliance (the ‘QCA Code’) and I believe that we 
are in full compliance with this, which serves to mitigate and 
minimise risk and add value to our businesses. 

One of our values:

Enjoying the journey in a culture 
of integrity, transparency and 
fairness, where we are proud of 
our past and excited by our 
future.

This section of the Annual Report and Accounts outlines 
how we have applied the principles of the QCA code during 
the year and we take the opportunity to share with you the 
many initiatives and activities that took place during 2021 to 
ensure a strong and open dialogue with our shareholders, 
particularly around how the Company is performing, to 
ensure that the Group Board remains a well-functioning and 
balanced team, and to enhance our governance structures 
to ensure that they remain fit for purpose and support good 
decision-making by the Group Board and its Committees. 

We will continue to review and update our governance 
framework and our approach as the Company continues to 
grow and will update the Corporate Governance statement 
in the AIM rule 26 section of the Company’s website. 
Additional information is contained in our Section 172(1) 
statement on pages 22-25.

Richard Law
Chair
22 March 2022

51

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021Our Governance Structure 

Group Board structure and composition
My role as Chair of the Group Board is to be separate to, 
and independent of, the Chief Executive and each of us has 
clearly defined responsibilities. These, along with the terms 
of reference for all the Committees of the Group Board, 
can be found on the Investors section of the 
Company’s website.

The Group Board comprises five Directors, two Executive 
Directors being Christopher Lee and Claire Thomson and 
three independent Non-executive Directors being myself, 
Yvonne Monaghan and Stuart Warriner. The Group Board 
believes that this combination ensures a clear balance of 
responsibilities between the executive and the non-
executive functions, and that no individual (or small  
group of individuals) can dominate the Group Board’s  
decision- making. 

GROUP BOARD COMPOSITION

2

1

2

Executive 

Non-executive 

Chair 

Operating Boards and Group Executive Committee 
structure and composition 
The Group is organised so that each business has an 
established Operating Board which meets monthly with its 
own standing agenda, which includes business updates from 
the heads of all key functions. Each Operating Board has a 
‘Divisional Lead’ which is Ashley McCune (President, 
Facilisgroup) and Karl Whiteside (Group MD, Brand 
Addition), further details of whom can be found in the 
senior executives’ biographies on page 66. Each Divisional 
Lead, together with other key members of their Operating 
Boards, report to the CEO on trading and performance 
through Executive Monthly Meetings, and also through the 
Divisional Lead’s membership of the Group Executive 
Committee. 

The Group Executive Committee is made up of the 
Executive Directors of the Company, the Divisional Lead for 
each of Facilisgroup and Brand Addition, the Group 
Financial Controller, the Group Senior ESG Officer and the 
Group General Counsel & Company Secretary. It meets 
monthly, has its own terms of reference in place and 
facilitates business updates, reporting, ESG, risk and 
compliance matters, and the flow of information throughout 
the Group to ensure the alignment of culture, business 
ethics and standards and consistent good governance 
across divisions. 

The Operating Boards typically meet prior to the Group 
Executive Committee meetings, which is before the Group 
Board meetings and enables the Executive Directors to 
provide the most up to date information possible to the 
members of the Group Board.

ESG governance 
The Group Board sets and approves Group ESG strategy 
and reviews and approves the Group’s ESG report on an 
annual basis, following consultation with the Group Senior 
ESG Officer and Group General Counsel & Company 
Secretary. The Group Board reviews progress against ESG 
strategy every six months as part of the Group Board’s 
strategy review meeting.

The Group Executive Committee includes an ESG update as 
a monthly standing agenda item and ensures regular 
communication and discussion of ESG strategy and progress 
with the Divisional Leads and other members of the 
Committee. 

Facilisgroup and Brand Addition each have their own ESG 
Committee or senior leader in place with responsibility for 
implementing the Group’s strategy and approach to ESG. 
They meet with the Group Senior ESG Officer on at least a 
quarterly basis for guidance, to provide updates and to 
ensure alignment with, and progress against, Group ESG 
strategy. 

ESG governance will be reviewed as part of the Group’s 
alignment with TCFD reporting requirements during 2022. 
For information on this, please see page 31 of the ESG 
section of this report.

Through this governance structure, the Group Board 
perpetuates an open, honest environment and its view of 
the right ethical culture, to drive effective risk management, 
governance practices and processes and effective decision-
making at all levels of the Group:

52

CORPORATE GOVERNANCEThe Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021Our Governance Structure

Chair of Group Board - Richard Law

Group Board  - The Pebble Group plc

Audit  
Committee

Remuneration 
Committee

Nomination 
Committee

CEO  
Chris Lee

Facilisgroup 
Executive Monthly 
Meeting

Group Executive 
Committee

Brand Addition 
Executive Monthly 
Meeting

Divisional Lead 
Ashley McCune

Divisional Lead  
Karl Whiteside

Operating Board 
Facilisgroup

Operating Board 
Brand Addition

Environmental, Social, and Governance

Risk and Compliance

Diversity, Equity & Inclusion

Group Board Committees
The Audit Committee
The Audit Committee, chaired by Yvonne Monaghan, has 
primary responsibility for monitoring the integrity of the 
financial statements of the Group and the scope, adequacy 
and effectiveness of the Group’s internal financial controls 
and internal control and risk management systems, to 
ensure that the financial performance and prospects of the 
Group are properly measured and reported on. The Audit 
Committee receives reports from the Group’s management 
and external auditor, PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP (PwC), 
relating to the annual accounts and the accounting and 
internal control environment in operation throughout the 
Group. The Audit Committee determines and reviews the 
Group’s risk profile, including the nature and extent of 
significant risks that the Group is willing to take in achieving 
its strategic objectives. Additional information on risk profile 
can be found on page 45-49 . The Audit Committee also 
provides channels of communication between the external 
auditor and the Non-executive Directors. It reviews the 
performance of the external auditor and makes 
recommendations to the Group Board in relation to their 
re¬appointment. The Audit Committee reports to the 
Group Board on all these matters and typically meets three 
times in each financial year. It met three times during 2021. 
Richard Law and Stuart Warriner are the other members of 
the Audit Committee. Further information can be found in 
the Audit Committee Report on pages 67-70.

The Remuneration Committee
The Remuneration Committee, chaired by Stuart Warriner, 
has primary responsibility to review the performance of the 
Executive Directors and determine their total individual 
remuneration packages (including on the granting of share 
options) to ensure that they are, in a fair and responsible 
manner, rewarded for their individual contributions to the 
Group’s overall performance. The Remuneration Committee 
also reviews the performance of other senior executives and 
monitors and makes recommendations to the Group Board 
on the level and structure of their remuneration. The 
Remuneration Committee will retain, as necessary, external 
remuneration consultants in support of its responsibilities. 
The Remuneration Committee reports to the Group Board 
on all these matters and will meet as and when necessary, 
but typically four times in each financial year. It met four 
times in 2021. In exercising this role, the members of the 
Remuneration Committee have regard to QCA Code 

53

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021Our Governance Structure 

recommendations and, where appropriate, the QCA 
Remuneration Committee Guide. The remuneration of 
Non-executive Directors is a matter for the Chair and the 
Executive Directors and no director shall be involved in any 
decisions as to his or her own remuneration. Richard Law and 
Yvonne Monaghan are the other members of the 
Remuneration Committee. Further information can be found 
in the Remuneration Committee Report on pages 71-79.

The Nomination Committee
As the Nomination Committee does not produce a separate 
report, the significant matters considered since the 2020 
Annual Report and Accounts are summarised here:
(i) 

 We discussed and introduced a formal Group policy on 
Diversity, Equity and Inclusion (DEI) which the Committee 
recommended to the Group Board for approval in 
October 2021. The DEI policy promotes diversity of 
ethnicity, gender, age, disability, education and socio-
economic backgrounds and sexual orientation. It also 
recognises diversity of personal attributes as having 
equal importance and aims to build teams that consists 
of individuals who have a range of cognitive and personal 
strengths. The DEI policy commitments include the 
appointment of an Executive Sponsor for all DEI issues in 
each business to ensure that DEI remains a firm priority 
on the agenda and is taken account of in all appropriate 
situations and decision-making. As Chair of the 
Nomination Committee, I am taking an active role in 
setting and meeting diversity objectives and strategies in 
each business by including a commitment in the DEI 
policy to meet annually with Executive Sponsors to 
discuss DEI initiatives, ensure we have clear objectives 
and to monitor DEI progress. Further the Group Board 
will each year take a retrospective look back over the 
preceding 12 months and ask itself the question, “How 
has our commitment to DEI advanced over the year?”
The DEI policy was approved by the Group Board in 
November 2021. An aim for the Nomination Committee 
during 2022 is to develop and encourage reporting on the 
policy, its objectives and linkage to Group strategy, then 
work on how to formally monitor how the policy is being 
implemented and progress on achieving its objectives.
 Enhancement of the Group Board appointment process 
for the recruitment of new Directors into a formal, 
rigorous and transparent six steps process that is 
designed to work hand-in-hand with the DEI policy.  
It involves identification of business needs, profile 

(ii) 

54

establishment, search, selection and nomination, 
followed by appointment and formal induction. The 
Committee recommended the Group Board 
appointment process to the Group Board and it was 
approved in November 2021.

(iii)   Introduction of a formal approach to succession planning, 
designed to work hand-in-hand with the DEI policy and to 
establish a process for ensuring that succession plans for 
orderly succession to both the Group Board and senior 
management positions are in place, developed and 
maintained, via action through the Group Executive 
Committee and activities within the businesses. The 
Committee recommended the succession planning 
approach and process, to be overseen by the Nomination 
Committee, to the Group Board and it was approved in 
November 2021. This includes:

a. 

b. 

c. 

 completion of succession matrix to include a risk 
assessment for the risk of immediate loss of 
Executive Directors, senior executives, members of 
the Operating Boards and other key personnel;

 internal talent identification amongst personnel by 
including ‘Potential to Progress’ ratings in annual 
appraisals for all mid-level management in the 
businesses; 
 working with HR teams to support and encourage 
training and development, to actively manage a 
pipeline of diverse internal talent when identified;

d. 

 the introduction of a skills matrix tool for  
Non-executive role evaluation and succession 
planning to help identify skills gaps and to map the 
existing skillset against possible requirements to 
execute strategy and meet future challenges. 
One aim for the Nomination Committee during 2022 is to 
begin to build an active link to the DEI policy and start to 
develop a diverse pipeline for succession. Each business 
has been tasked with establishing a methodology on 
activity to ensure a practical impact. Progress will be 
reported to the Nomination Committee on an annual 
basis. The aim is to ensure that succession to the Group 
Board and senior management positions is based on 
merit and objective criteria and promotes diversity of 
ethnicity, gender, age, disability, education and socio-
economic backgrounds and sexual orientation.

(iv)   In October 2021, the Committee reviewed the process 
and assessment criteria for the annual Group Board and 
Committee effectiveness review in advance of the 
Group Board conducting the review in November 2021 
to assess how it could be developed or improved.  
On process, the Committee considered: 

CORPORATE GOVERNANCEThe Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021a. 

b. 

 trends of using digital board evaluation platforms/
soft ware/tools; 

 interviews outside of the Group Board meeting 
itself; and 

c.  external review/third party facilitator. 

On the assessment, the Committee considered: 

a.  sufficient linkage with the Group’s objectives;

b.  development of individual director reviews; 

c. 

d. 

 development of a separate process to evaluate the 
Chair; and 

 whether evaluation topics/criteria reflect 
priorities, are fit-for-purpose and cover areas our 
stakeholders really care about. 

The Committee concluded that the process is fit for 
purpose given the size, nature and complexity of the 
Group Board and its Committees, the current stability 
of the composition and the Group Board’s maturity. 
However, the Committee updated the assessment 
criteria to enhance the following areas to reflect the 
QCAs list of characteristics of an ‘effective board’: 
Group Board mix of skills, experience and knowledge; 
Group Board independence; Group Board 
understanding of the business; risk appetite and risk 
management; demonstrating Group Board stewardship; 
and role of Chair. A new section on Group Board 
diversity was also introduced.
 On Group Board structure, size and composition, in 
November 2021 the Nomination Committee introduced 
a process to consider Group Board requirements over 
the next five years vs. current, using a director skills 
matrix as a tool to assist in planning for future Group 
Board needs in the context of the Group’s likely 
expansion. This identified that potential future 
opportunities were likely to be created as the Group 
expands and the Group Board’s strategic plan was 
updated to explore this further.

(v) 

(vi)   In November 2021, the Committee considered and 

reviewed Group Board Committee membership and time 
requirements of Non-executive Directors. It also 
conducted a review of its own performance and 
effectiveness as a committee over 2021. No changes were 
recommended to the Group Board as a result, and the 
Committee’s terms of reference were recommended to 
the Group Board for re-approval without amendment.

(vii)   During Q1 22 the Nomination Committee conducted a 

performance evaluation, which considered the 
independence of each Director and their knowledge, 
skills and experience. It concluded that each Director 
continued to make an effective and valuable 
contribution to the Group Board, and that each 
Director demonstrated a strong commitment to their 
role and to the long-term success of the Group. The 
Committee recommended to the Group Board that all 
Directors should seek re-election by the Group’s 
shareholders at the 2022 AGM.

Key governance policies
The Group has conducted a review of its key governance 
policies during 2021, firstly to ensure that they remain up to 
date and continue to reflect best practice, but also to 
ensure that the Group’s aims, values and objectives are 
cascaded and applied consistently through our businesses. 
Certain new policies were also developed and implemented 
to align with our ESG strategy.

The following key governance policies and processes are in 
place across the Group:
• anti-bribery and corruption policy
• anti-slavery and human trafficking policy
• environmental, social and governance policy
• diversity, equity and inclusion policy
• data protection policy
• whistleblowing policy 
Further information on the anti-slavery and human 
trafficking policy, anti-bribery and corruption policy and 
whistleblowing policy can be found in the Audit Committee 
Report on pages 67-70.
During the year, the Group has also been focusing on the 
development and enhancement of its governance polices 
and processes. It will continue with the development, then 
implementation, of the following in 2022:
• an overall Framework on Conduct, Ethics and Compliance 

to overarch all policies and bring them together in a 
coherent way; 

• climate change policy;
• health, safety and well-being policy; and 
• human rights policy.
Our Group General Counsel & Company Secretary and/or 
our Group Senior ESG Officer are working on these policies 
closely with the CEO and the Divisional Leads of 
Facilisgroup and Brand Addition. 

55

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021Our Governance Structure 

Group Board and senior team diversity 
We believe that a diverse and inclusive culture at the top of our organisation will 
lead to better decision-making and ultimately to a better business and place to 
work for our global workforce. Our approach to diversity, equity and inclusion is 
explained on page 31 in the ESG section of this report.

The Group Board also believes that it has a desirable range of different skills, 
experiences and backgrounds, further details of which can be found in the Group 
Board biographies on pages 64-65. This diversity of experience has continued to 
develop our businesses during the year, overseeing and ensuring focus on two key 
objectives: the continued investment in our medium-term growth plan for 
Facilisgroup with the delivery of our FY 21 milestones; and the execution of an 
immediate and full recovery over FY 19 revenue levels in FY 21 for Brand Addition. 
Details of progress against these objectives has been provided throughout the 
Strategic Report on pages 2 -49. 

GROUP BOARD MEMBERS

GROUP EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE MEMBERS

OPERATING BOARDS (AND THEIR DIRECT 

REPORTS) AND GROUP EXECUTIVE 

COMMITTEE

60%

Female 

Male 

40%

43%

57%

45%

55%

Female 

Male 

Female 

Male 

The Group Board has a good gender 
balance as it comprises three male and 
two female Directors.

We also have good gender 
balance throughout the senior 
teams within our businesses. Our 
Group Executive Committee 
consists of four female and three 
male senior executives.

Collectively, our Operating Board 
members and their direct reports, 
together with our Group Executive 
Committee, consist of 28 female and 
23 male senior managers.

56

CORPORATE GOVERNANCEThe Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021Corporate governance statement

Delivering long-term growth.

The Directors believe that the QCA Code which sets out best practice corporate 
governance arrangements for small and mid-sized quoted companies, particularly 
those on AIM, remains most appropriate for the Company. 
This section of the Annual Report and Accounts outlines how we have applied the ten principles of the 
QCA Code during the year.

Principle 1:

Establish a strategy and 
business model which 
promotes long-term value 
for shareholders.

Commentary

The Group Board has a clear strategy for delivering long-
term shareholder value. The Chair and CEO work closely to 
ensure the message and direction is strong and understood.

The Group Board held its annual strategy event over two 
days in October 2021 to discuss its ongoing vision for the 
Group, its direction and strategic priorities. The output 
focussed on: 
• driving increased scale; 
• our people and team structures;
• accelerating our long-term growth aspirations. 

Cross-reference 
to detail

The Company’s 
business model and 
strategy are 
detailed in the following 
sections of this Report:

•  at a glance on page 4

•  the Chair’s report on 

page 12

•  the CEO’s review on 

page 14

•  throughout the 

Strategic Report on 
pages 2-49

•  strategy in action on 

page 17

Principle 2:

Seek to understand and 
meet shareholder needs 
and expectations.

The Executive Directors have primary responsibility for 
contact with shareholders and enjoy maintaining an active 
and frequent dialogue. They provide regular Group Board 
updates on shareholder meetings and provide the  
Non-executive Directors with all reports and feedback 
issued by analysts to support their understanding of the 
view of the Group by the investment community.

The Directors met with shareholders during the year as part 
of a planned programme of investor relations and when 
requested made themselves available for meetings. 
Shareholder engagement sessions in 2021 were well 
attended and received positively.

The Group Executive Committee discusses shareholder 
needs and expectations in the context of upcoming market 
announcements and other touchpoints at every monthly 
meeting and reviews investor feedback received following 
each of those touchpoints. 

The 2022 AGM will repeat the arrangements established in 
2021 to ensure maximum opportunity for shareholder 
engagement in that forum by enabling shareholders to view 
the meeting via a live webcast and participate via live Q&A 
functionality. With the future needs and expectations of our 
shareholders in mind, the Company amended its Articles of 
Association in 2021 to permit ‘hybrid’ general meetings. 

Should you wish to request a meeting or submit a question, 
please contact investors@thepebblegroup.com.

How we engage 
with shareholders is 

detailed in the 
Stakeholder Engagement 
section on page 21.

Investor 
presentations can 

be found on the 
Company’s website. 

Information on 
‘hybrid’ meeting 

provisions in the Articles 
of Association can be 
found on the Company’s 
website.

57

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

Corporate governance statement

Principle 3:

Take into account wider 
stakeholder and social 
responsibilities and  
their implications for 
long-term success.

Our values identify the importance of all our stakeholders 
and our commitment to social responsibilities, 
demonstrating how integral these matters are to the 
Group’s culture. 

The Group works consistently to strengthen the 
relationships it has with all of its stakeholders.

Principle 4:

Embed effective risk 
management, considering 
both opportunities and 
threats, throughout the 
organisation.

The Group Board uses a considered approach to risk 
management and acknowledges the need to accept a 
certain level of strategic risk to achieve capital growth 
for shareholders. 

Risk management is embedded from the Group Board to the 
Audit Committee, to the Group Executive Committee, to the 
Operating Boards. There is an effective process for identifying, 
assessing and managing risks in this framework. The Audit 
Committee provides the assurance that the risk management 
and related control systems in place are effective.

Our values are on 
the inside front 

cover.

Information on how 
our business model 

identifies key resources 
and relationships is 
contained on page 6.

How the Company 
obtains stakeholder 
feedback and the output 
of that is in the 
Stakeholder Engagement 
section on pages 18-21.

Approach to wider 
stakeholder and 

social responsibilities is 
set out in our Section 
172(1) statement on 
pages 22 - 25.

The risk 
management 
framework is explained, 
together with details of 
the key risks and 
opportunities facing the 
Group and related 
mitigating actions to 
manage these risks, on 
pages 45-49.

The Audit 
Committee report 
on page 67 explains how 
it oversees the 
effectiveness and 
integrity of the internal 
control systems.

58

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021Principle 5:

Maintain the Board as a 
well-functioning, 
balanced team led by the 
Chair.

The Group Board has strong independent representation, a 
good balance between the Executive and the Non-executive 
Directors and a good gender balance.

Executive Directors dedicate a full-time commitment to the 
Company. Non-executive Directors provided a strong time 
commitment in 2021, allocating sufficient time to effectively 
discharge their responsibilities. This included the 
preparation for, attendance at, and dealing with actions 
arising from all Group Board and Committee meetings, 
which had full attendance. 

The Chair and Company Secretary keep Group Board 
processes under review to develop and formalise, including 
conducting detailed annual planning and agenda setting.  
This results in the Group Board and its Committees 
receiving high quality, accurate and timely information  
on a regular basis. 

The Company is satisfied that the current Group Board is 
sufficiently resourced to discharge its governance 
obligations on behalf of all stakeholders and will consider 
the requirement for additional Non-executive Directors as 
the Company fulfils its growth objectives.

The 2021 Annual Group Board Effectiveness review 
highlighted the role of the Chair, the relationship between 
the Chair and CEO, the effective functioning of the Group 
Board and its strengths as a balanced team as particular 
strong points.

Group Board 
structure and 
composition details are 
on page 52.

Detailed 
information on 

Group Board and 
Committee meeting 
frequency and 
attendance can be found 
in the Group Board of 
Directors section on 
pages 64-65.

Information on how 
the Nomination 

Committee actively 
reviewed Group Board 
structure, size and 
composition in 2021, is 
on pages 54-55.

Details of the 
Nomination 
Committee update 

to its Group Board 
effectiveness review 
criteria in 2021 (to ensure 
it remained fit-for-
purpose) is on 
pages 54-55.

For full details of 
the Annual Group 

Board Effectiveness 
review 2021 results, see 
Principle 7 below.

59

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021Corporate governance statement

Principle 6:

Ensure that between 
them the Directors have 
the necessary up-to-date 
experience, skills and 
capabilities.

Director’s skills and 
experience are 
detailed on pages 64 and 
65 and also on the 
Company’s website. 

For full details of 
the results of the 

2021 Annual Group Board 
Effectiveness review, see 
Principle 7 below.

For full details of 
the Director 
performance evaluation 
conducted by the 
Nomination Committee in 
Q1 22, see pages 54-55.

The use of 
professional adviser 
services has been 
set out in the reports of 
each of the Group 
Board’s Committees 
contained in this Report, 
where applicable.

All Directors are professionally active. Each has 
demonstrated that they possess the appropriate skills, 
capabilities and experience for the roles they perform at 
the Company, including as members of the Group Board 
and its Committees. Group Board experience is extensive 
and varied, and the mix of personal qualities (including 
gender balance) contributes to the Group Board’s ability as 
a whole to deliver the Company’s strategic objectives. 

The 2021 Group Board effectiveness review assessed the 
performance of the individual Directors and found no 
issues. Further, all Directors were re-elected at the 2021 
AGM. It is the Company’s intention to continue to subject all 
Directors to re-election annually. 

A Director performance evaluation by the Nomination 
Committee in Q1 22 concluded that each Director 
continued to make an effective and valuable contribution to 
the Group Board, and that each Director demonstrated a 
strong commitment to their role and to the long-term 
success of the Company. 

The Company Secretary acts as adviser to the Chair and the 
Group Board, with responsibility for ensuring effective 
Group Board processes are followed. Monthly ‘Boardroom 
Briefings’ are circulated to update Directors on topical 
issues, such as: corporate culture; Directors and their 
responsibilities; executive remuneration, ESG or climate 
related issues and disclosure requirements. 

The Company’s external auditor, PwC, provides regulatory 
updates and briefings to the Group Board three times per 
year on relevant corporate reporting developments or 
similar ‘hot topics’ for the year under review.
The Company’s NOMAD provides annual Group Board 
training and a briefing pack on the AIM Rules, Market Abuse 
Regulation, managing price sensitive information and other 
regulatory updates.

The Group Board is given the opportunity to keep in touch 
with relevant developments through appropriate seminars 
and formal external training courses facilitated by the 
Company Secretary to ensure continued development of 
knowledge, skill and capability. 

Fostering a culture of continuous improvement is important 
to the Chair, who will lead in personal development by 
participating in training and continued professional 
development.

The Group Board and Committees have access to 
professional advisors at the Company’s expense, if 
necessary. 

60

CORPORATE GOVERNANCEThe Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021Principle 7:

Evaluate Board 
performance based on 
clear and relevant 
objectives, seeking 
continuous improvement.

The Group Board, led by the Chair, 
fosters a culture of continuous 
improvement to maximise the 
effectiveness of board practices. It 
performs an annual formal assessment 
of the effectiveness of the Group 
Board and its performance as a unit as 
well as that of its Committees and the 
individual Directors.

The process is conducted internally by 
the Group Board and not on an 
anonymous basis, to reflect the open 
culture and nature of the Group 
Board:
• The Chair of the Group Board is 

responsible for and leads the process 
with assistance from the Company 
Secretary to ensure that all Directors 
are actively engaged.
• Completion of a written 

questionnaire by all Directors, covers 
‘Composition and Process’ and 
‘Behaviours and Activities’. 

• A written report from the Chair on 
the results is tabled for full Board 
discussion.

• Directors’ evaluation of the results is 
facilitated by the Company Secretary.
• Actions are included and followed-up 

as part of standard Group Board 
process.

The Nomination Committee reviews 
the Group Board effectiveness 
process annually to enhance and 
improve the exercise. The process 
followed in 2021 was as per the above, 
which was considered to remain 
fit-for-purpose given the size, nature 
and complexity of the Group Board 
and its Committees, current stability of 
composition and governance maturity. 
However, the questionnaire was 
enhanced to reflect the QCA’s list of 
characteristics of an ‘effective board’.

Details of the Nomination Committee 
update to its Group Board effectiveness 

review criteria in 2021 (to ensure it remained 
fit-for-purpose) is on page 54.

Detailed information on how the 
Nomination Committee actively reviewed 

Group Board structure, size and composition 
in 2021 can be found on page 55. 

Results and recommendations of 
November 2021 Review
Particular strengths highlighted:
• tone from the top, the role of the 

Chair and strong positive relationship 
with CEO

• Group Board independence, 
knowledge and experience, 
attendance and active contribution at 
meetings, Group Board operation as 
a team in an accountable, open and 
transparent environment and time 
commitment of Non-executive 
Directors

• Group Board access to, and good use 
of, appropriate data to monitor the 
Company’s performance
• Group Board creation of a 

performance culture that drives value 
creation without excessive risk 
exposure
• DEI policy
• crisis response capabilities and crisis 

management plans

Recommendations:
• Group Board to consider attendance 
of the Chair at a selection of investor 
meetings for shareholder availability 
and visibility

• CEO to explore enhanced ESG 

resource within our operations to 
shape ESG priorities and further 
develop ESG strategy in preparation 
for possible future formal evaluation 
of ESG/Sustainability governance as 
part of the evolving Group Board 
Effectiveness review process

Progress against previous 
recommendations 
The Group Board has addressed the 
areas for development identified in the 
first performance review as outlined in 
the Company’s 2020 Annual Report 
and Accounts. In particular:
• The Nomination Committee has 

introduced a process to consider 
Group Board requirements over the 
next five years vs. current using a 
director skills matrix as a tool to 
assist in planning for future Group 
Board needs in the context of the 
Company’s likely expansion.

Detailed information on how the 
Nomination Committee has introduced a 

formal approach to succession planning is set 
out on page 54.

• The Nomination Committee has 
introduced a formal approach to 
succession planning and established a 
process for ensuring that succession 
plans are in place for orderly 
succession to both the Group Board 
and senior management positions.
• There is formal annual focus and 

oversight on crisis management and 
disaster recovery at Group Board 
level, particularly in the areas of IT 
and cyber security and data security 
risks due to detailed board planning 
by the Chair and Company Secretary. 
Divisional leads of Facilisgroup and 
Brand Addition and IT senior 
management presented to the Group 
Board in September 2021 on disaster 
recovery and business continuity 
plans. As a result, crisis response 
capabilities and crisis management 
plans were highlighted as a particular 
strength in the 2021 Group Board 
effectiveness review. 

• The Remuneration Committee takes 

into account periodic external 
comparisons to examine current 
market trends and practices at 
equivalent roles in similar companies. 
The Remuneration Committee also 
appoints external consultants where 
appropriate, to provide advice. 
During Q4 21 such a periodic review 
took place.

61

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021Corporate governance statement

responsible for ensuring the 
implementation and communication of 
policies and ensuring that any Group 
policies are reflected in Brand 
Addition’s and Facilisgroup’s respective 
equivalent local policies.

Any non-compliance with policies is 
reported by the Divisional Lead of 
Facilisgroup and Brand Addition via the 
Group Executive Committee to the 
relevant Group Board Committee and 
ultimately the Group Board for 
monitoring on an ongoing basis.

In October 2021, the Company 
published its first ESG report in which 
it set out its ESG strategy and the 
framework which underpins its 
approach to ESG.

During 2021, the Group has also been 
focusing on the development and 
enhancement of its governance polices 
and processes and will continue with 
its development, then implementation 
of the same in 2022.

For details on the upcoming policies 
under development for introduction in 

2022, please see page 55.

Principle 8:

Promote a corporate 
culture that is based on 
ethical values and 
behaviours.

During 2021, the Group formally 
adopted its values. They shape our 
culture, define who we are, what we 
do and how we act. We believe they 
demonstrate our commitment to 
ethical behaviour. 

The policies assist in embedding a 
culture of ethical behaviour for all 
employees. In addition, we seek to 
work with agents, contractors, 
business partners and other third 
parties who work with us or on our 
behalf, who share our zero-tolerance 
approach to certain activities e.g., 
bribery and corruption, and we expect 
them to behave consistently with the 
provisions of certain of our policies. 

For details of the key governance policies 
in place across the Group, please see 

page 55.

For details of our values please see inside 
front cover. 

Information on monitoring compliance 
with certain policies can be found in the 

Audit Committee Report on pages 67-70.

The Group Board also monitors the 
state of culture and employee 
satisfaction at present by including 
minutes of the Brand Addition 
employee forum for noting at each 
Group Board meeting.

The CEO in conjunction with the 
Company Secretary or the Group 
Senior ESG Officer is responsible for 
reviewing the suitability, adequacy and 
effectiveness of the policies and for 
making improvements as appropriate. 
The HR Department in each business is 

For information on how the Company’s 
culture is consistent with its objectives, 
strategy and business model, please see the 
Strategic Report pages 2-49.

The Group Board monitors and 
promotes an ethical corporate culture 
by having documented key governance 
policies in place which are reviewed 
and re-approved annually to ensure 
that they remain up to date and 
continue to reflect best practice. It is 
extremely important to the Group 
Board that policies or practices not 
only align with best practice but are 
designed in a meaningful way and fit 
with our culture and way of working. 

Our assessment of our principle risks and 
uncertainties reflects our ethical culture 
and balanced risk appetite. For details, please 
see pages 45-49.

62

CORPORATE GOVERNANCEThe Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021Principle 9:

Maintain governance 
structures and processes 
that are fit for purpose 
and support good 
decision-making by the 
Board.

The Group’s governance structures have evolved and 
developed since IPO, so that they fit naturally with our 
culture and way of working. They will remain under review 
during 2022 and will evolve where required in line with the 
Company’s planned growth. 

The role of each member of the Group Board is clearly 
defined. The Chair is responsible for the operation of the 
Group Board and for corporate governance within the 
Group. The CEO is responsible for proposing the strategic 
direction of the Group Board and implementing the strategy 
once approved. The CFO is responsible for all financial 
matters and engagement with shareholders. 

The Group’s 
governance 
structures are explained 
on pages 52-56.

More detail on the 
Group Board roles 
and responsibilities can 
be found on the 
corporate governance 
section of the 
Company’s website.

The Group Board reviews its formal schedule of matters 
reserved for the Group Board and each Committee reviews 
its terms of reference on an annual basis to ensure they 
remain fit for purpose and support good decision-making. 

The roles of the 
Group Board’s 

Committees are 
described in detail on 
pages 53-55.

The Group Board and its Committees operate within formal 
processes and timetables facilitated by the Company 
Secretary. Each meeting has an agenda, a Group Board 
reporting template (with Section 172 guidance), appropriate 
and timely information is circulated in good time prior to 
each meeting, and meetings are planned to ensure that 
appropriate time is allotted for open and in-depth 
discussion. All actions arising are formally tracked, followed 
up by the Company’s management and reported. The Chair 
and Company Secretary keep Group Board processes under 
review to develop and formalise, including conducting 
detailed annual planning and agenda setting which aligns 
with the terms of reference. This results in the Group Board 
and its Committees receiving high quality, accurate and 
timely information on a regular basis which supports good 
decision-making by the Directors.

The detailed responses to the principles of the QCA Code in 
this section of the Report, in conjunction with the related 
information throughout this Report, communicates to 
shareholders and other relevant stakeholders how the 
Company is governed.

In October 2021, the Company published its first ESG 
Report in which it set out its ESG strategy and the 
framework which underpins its approach to ESG.

The schedule of 
matters reserved 

for the Group Board 
and each Committee’s 
terms of reference can 
be found on the 
Company’s website 

See the details 
included at 
Principle 2 above as to 
how the Company 
maintains an active 
dialogue with its 
shareholders on 
Company performance 
through a planned 
programme of investor 
relations. 

A range of 
Company 
information is included 
on the Company’s 
website.

Further 
information can be 

requested from 
investors@
thepebblegroup.com

63

Principle 10:

Communicate how the 
Company is governed  
and is performing by 
maintaining a dialogue 
with shareholders and 
other relevant stakeholders.

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021Board of Directors

Leading with experience.

KEY TO COMMITTEE MEMBERSHIP

A   Audit Committee

R   Remuneration Committee

N   Nomination Committee

  Committee Chair

64

Richard Law
Chair

Tenure
2 years 4 months

Experience
Richard has broad senior management and 
Board experience of business, engineering, 
corporate finance, technology and 
governance spanning 40 years. Richard 
retired as Chief Executive Officer of 
AIM-quoted GB Group plc in 2017, having led 
the company from a market capitalisation of 
£5 million to £500 million, and took up a 
portfolio role investing in and chairing both 
public and private companies. As well as 
chairing The Pebble Group plc, Richard is 
currently the Chairman of Vypr (a product 
intelligence and performance accelerator) 
and Chairman designate of SmartSearch  
(a provider of online compliance solutions).

Skills brought to the Group Board
• Extensive financial expertise
• Extensive and diverse leadership experience 
• Sound practical understanding of 

corporate governance

• Deep appreciation of investor sentiment 
• Strong understanding of ecommerce and 

data solutions

External appointments
• Non-executive Director and Chairman at 
Vypr Validation Technologies Limited 

• Non-executive Director at Gudtouch Limited
• Chairman designate Smart Credit Limited 

(t/a SmartSearch) – part time 

Committee membership
A   R   N

Meetings attended in 2021
Board meetings 

Audit Committee meetings 

Remuneration Committee meetings 

Nomination Committee meetings 

11/11

3/3

4/4

3/3

Christopher (Chris) Lee
Chief Executive Officer (CEO)

Tenure
22 years

Experience
Chris led the private equity backed 
management buyout of Brand Addition in 
2012 and 2017 and the acquisitions of 
Gateway CDI and Facilisgroup in 2016 and 
2018 and the listing of The Pebble Group plc 
onto AIM in 2019.

Skills brought to the Group Board
• Sound, proven leadership skills and a 

considered strategic approach, developing 
the Group’s capabilities for sustainable 
growth

• Detailed understanding of the market and 

sector with significant knowledge of 
commercial, client and operational 
matters 

• Successful transaction and M&A 

experience

• Client and supplier relationship 

management, contracting and negotiations

• A thorough understanding of stakeholder 

priorities including the development of the 
senior executives and ESG issues

Committee Membership
• Group Executive Committee

Meetings attended in 2021
Board meetings 

11/11

Group Executive Committee meetings  9/9

CORPORATE GOVERNANCEThe Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021Claire Thomson
Chief Financial Officer (CFO)

Tenure
14 years 

Experience
Claire has led the finance, banking, legal and 
compliance aspects of the businesses which 
now comprise the Group for over 13 years, 
taking the role of Chief Financial Officer 
following the management buyout in 2012. 
Claire is a qualified Chartered Accountant and 
prior to joining the Group, spent 11 years in 
audit at PricewaterhouseCoopers, having 
joined in 1997. Claire has a BA Hons degree in 
English and American Literature from the 
University of Manchester.

Skills brought to the Group Board
• Extensive finance, financial reporting and 

financial management expertise

• Sound, proven leadership skills
• Wide in-depth knowledge of each 

business area

• Successful transaction and M&A 

experience

• Significant experience of effective risk 

management and internal controls

• Investor relations 

External appointments
• Director at Cheadle Hulme School

Committee Membership
• Group Executive Committee

Yvonne Monaghan 
Independent Non-executive 
Director and Senior Independent 
Director 

Tenure
2 years 4 months

Experience 
Yvonne has been the Chief Financial Officer 
of Johnson Service Group PLC since 2007 and 
played an important role in returning the 
company to a growth strategy, managing a 
number of acquisitions and disposals. She was 
a Non-executive Director of NWF Group plc 
from 2013 until she stepped down from this 
role in September 2020.

Yvonne is a qualified Chartered Accountant 
and spent five years in audit at Deloitte 
Haskins & Sells, before joining Johnson Service 
Group PLC in 1984. Yvonne has a BSc Honours 
degree in Pharmacology and Physiology from 
the University of Manchester.  

Skills brought to the Group Board
• Extensive financial and financial reporting 

expertise

• Sound practical understanding of 

corporate governance

• Significant understanding of audit 

processes, risk management and controls

• Deep appreciation of investor sentiment 

External appointments 
• Chief Financial Officer of Johnson Service 

Group PLC

• Elected to the CBI North West Regional 
Council with effect from 1 January 2021

Stuart Warriner 
Independent Non-executive 
Director 

Tenure
2 years 4 months

Experience 
Stuart has extensive corporate finance 
experience across a range of sectors, 
having spent over 30 years at 
PricewaterhouseCoopers where he was a 
partner in its corporate finance business. 
Stuart has an MA in Economics from the 
University of Cambridge and is a qualified 
Chartered Accountant. 

Skills brought to the Group Board
• Expertise in M&A 
• Track record in advising Boards including 

on strategy and shareholder value 

• Sound practical understanding of 

corporate governance

External appointments 
• Senior Advisor at Houlihan Lokey
• Non-executive Director of strategy and 
communications agency Lodestone 
Oxford Limited

Committee membership 
A   R   N

Committee membership
A   R   N

Meetings attended in 2021
Group Board meetings 

Meetings attended in 2021
Group Board meetings 

11/11

Group Executive Committee meetings  9/9

Audit Committee meetings 

Remuneration Committee meetings 

Nomination Committee meetings 

Meetings attended in 2021
Group Board meetings 

Audit Committee meetings 

Remuneration Committee meetings 

Nomination Committee meetings 

11/11

3/3

4/4

3/3

11/11

3/3

4/4

3/3

65

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021 
Senior Executives

Divisional Leads

Lucy Penfold
Group General Counsel & 
Company Secretary

Tenure
1 year, 3 months

Experience
Prior to joining The Pebble Group, Lucy had  
13 years’ experience as in-house legal counsel 
at AXA UK plc where she specialised in 
corporate and commercial law and acted for 
the group’s various UK subsidiaries, including 
advising on a number of acquisitions, disposals, 
re-organisations and corporate integrations. 
Whilst at AXA UK, Lucy also gained experience 
of company secretarial support, corporate 
governance and risk management whilst in her 
role as Assistant Company Secretary. Prior to 
that, Lucy spent two years practicing 
corporate law as an associate at Olswang LLP, 
where she also trained for two years and 
qualified as a solicitor in 2005. Lucy has a BA 
Hons degree in Accountancy & Law from the 
University of Manchester.

Skills
• M&A, corporate law and group 

re-organisation

• Commercial contract drafting and 

negotiation

• Corporate governance
• Risk management 

Committee membership
• Group Executive Committee

Meetings attended in 2021
Group Executive Committee meetings  8/9

Ashley McCune
President, Facilisgroup

Karl Whiteside
Group MD, Brand Addition

Tenure
15 years

Tenure
4 years

Experience
Ashley oversaw the finance, operations and 
marketing aspects of Facilisgroup as a 
senior leader for over 10 years. She was 
appointed President of Facilisgroup in 
2020, following the acquisition by The 
Pebble Group in 2019 and departure of the 
legacy owners. Ashley has 18 years of 
experience in the promotional products 
industry with experience in both the 
distributor and technology arenas. She has 
a BS degree in Business from Southern 
Illinois University.

Skills 
• Strong and extensive industry and sector 

knowledge

• Business and senior team leadership 
• Strategy development
• Operational management 
• Partner relationship management 
• Negotiations
• Organisational development
• Experience of organic growth 

Board and Committee membership
• Group Executive Committee

Meetings attended in 2021
Group Executive Committee meetings  8/9

Experience
Karl has led the US division of Brand 
Addition since 2017. Prior to joining Brand 
Addition, Karl led supply chain and logistics 
teams throughout North America as well as 
inside sales, sourcing, and billing teams for 
Staples Promotional Products for 10 years. 
Before joining the creative merchandise 
industry, Karl spent time in National 
Account Sales roles with Newell Brands and 
Samsonite. Karl has a BS degree in 
marketing from Truman State University.

Skills 
• Business strategy planning and execution
• Operational and efficiency management
• Extensive industry and sector knowledge
• Executive leadership and mentoring
• Management of global teams 
• Risk management and supply chain 

strategy planning

Board and Committee membership
• Group Executive Committee

Meetings attended in 2021
Group Executive Committee meetings  9/9

66

CORPORATE GOVERNANCEThe Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

Audit Committee report

Monitoring the quality 
of internal controls.

Dear shareholder,
I am pleased to present the Audit Committee Report for 
the year ended 31 December 2021.  

Composition and experience of the Audit Committee
I am Chair of the Committee which consists of all three 
independent Non-executive Directors (Stuart Warriner, 
Richard Law and myself) and is supported by Lucy Penfold 
as Company Secretary. All three Non-executive Directors 
are qualified chartered accountants, with considerable 
business experience in senior financial and operational 
roles, including knowledge of financial markets, as detailed 
in the Group Board biographies on pages 64-65. All 
members of the Committee are regarded as having recent 
and relevant experience.

The Committee meets three times per year, including once 
at the planning stage before the external audit and once 
after the external audit at the reporting stage, to facilitate 
discussions relating to the financial statements and internal 
controls of the Group. The meetings are attended by the 
CEO and CFO, as well as the external auditor, PwC. In 2021 
all three meetings had full attendance. Additionally, the 
Committee meets the external auditor at least once per 
year without executive management present, to discuss the 
auditor’s remit and any issues arising.

Responsibilities of the Audit Committee
Throughout the year, the Committee continued to fulfil its 
duties on behalf of the Group Board. It has an established, 
structured agenda closely aligned to the Group’s reporting 
cycle. 

The responsibilities of the Committee are defined by the 
Terms of Reference which can be viewed on the Company’s 
website. These include primary responsibility for:
• reviewing the effectiveness of the Group’s internal 

controls, including review of the scope and adequacy of 
the Company’s processes and controls in respect of 
whistleblowing and anti-bribery;

67

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

Audit Committee report

• monitoring and reviewing the effectiveness of the Group’s 

• appropriateness of the carrying value of goodwill, 

internal audit function;

• considering the review of material business risks and 
reviewing internal control processes to identify and 
monitor risks;

• monitoring the integrity of the Group’s financial statements 
and the external announcements of the Group’s results, 
including reviewing, and challenging where necessary, 
significant financial reporting issues and judgements which 
they contain; 

• advising on the clarity of disclosures and information 

contained in the Annual Report and Accounts and giving an 
opinion to the Group Board on whether the Annual Report 
and Accounts are fair, balanced and understandable;

• ensuring consistency in application of and compliance with 

applicable accounting standards; and 

• overseeing the relationship with the external auditor 

including recommending approval of their appointment 
and approving their remuneration, reviewing their reports 
and ensuring their independence is maintained.

The Audit Committee reports to the Group Board on all 
these matters. 

Evaluation of the effectiveness of the Audit 
Committee
To ensure that it is operating at maximum effectiveness, the 
Committee used output of the formal Group Board 
Effectiveness review detailed on page 61 to review and 
evaluate its own performance, constitution and Terms of 
Reference during Q4 21. It concluded that the Committee 
was operating effectively, and no action or changes were 
required to be recommended to the Group Board. No 
issues arose from the Terms of Reference which were 
re-approved by the Group Board without amendment.

Significant matters considered in relation to the 
financial statements
At the request of the Group Board, the Audit Committee 
considered whether the 2021 Annual Report and Accounts 
were fair, balanced and understandable and whether they 
provided the necessary information for Shareholders to 
assess the Group’s performance, business model and 
strategy. The Committee were satisfied that, taken as a 
whole, the 2021 Annual Report and Accounts are fair, 
balanced and understandable.

The Audit Committee assesses whether suitable accounting 
policies have been adopted and whether appropriate 
estimates and judgements have been made by 
management. The Committee also reviews accounting 
papers prepared by management, and reviews reports by 
the external auditor. The specific areas reviewed by the 
Committee during the year were:
• review of the capitalisation of software development 

costs;

68

intangibles and investments; 

• accounting for supplier contributions;
• Alternative Performance Measures; and
• going concern assessment.

Alternative Performance Measures (APM’s)
Throughout the Annual Report and Accounts we refer to a 
number of APM’s. These are used by the Group to provide 
additional clarity to the Group’s financial performance and 
are used internally by management to monitor business 
performance, in its budgeting and forecasting and also for 
determination of Directors’ and senior team remuneration. 

The Committee is aware that APM’s are non-IFRS measures. 
APM’s used by the Group are as follows:
• Adjusted EBITDA which means operating profit before 

depreciation, amortisation, share-based payments charge 
and exceptional items

• Adjusted operating profit which means operating profit 

before amortisation of acquired intangible assets,  
share-based payments charge and exceptional items

• Adjusted profit before tax which means profit before tax, 
amortisation of acquired intangible assets, share-based 
payments charge and exceptional items

• Adjusted Earnings which means profit after tax before 

amortisation of acquired intangible assets, share-based 
payments charge and exceptional items

• Adjusted earnings per share which means Adjusted 

Earnings divided by a weighted average number of shares 
in issue

• Adjusted operating cash flow which is calculated as 

Adjusted EBITDA less movements in working capital, capital 
expenditure and lease payments

The Committee considers the APM’s, all of which exclude 
the effect of non-recurring items or non-operating events, 
provide useful information for Shareholders on the 
underlying performance of the Group. The Committee is 
satisfied that where APM’s are used, they are presented 
with equal prominence to the statutory figures.

External audit
The Audit Committee has responsibility for the 
recommendation for re-appointment and deciding the 
remuneration of the Group’s external auditor and satisfying 
itself that they maintain their independence regardless of 
any non-audit work performed by them.

During the year, the Group adopted a policy on the supply 
of non-audit services by its external auditor, which ensures 
the Group is compliant with the Financial Reporting 
Council’s (FRC) Ethical Standards. The Group has adopted 
the FRC’s “Whitelist” of permitted non-audit services, and 
in relation to the provision of such services, the Audit 
Committee is responsible for approving all non-audit 
services that are not deemed trivial. The Audit Committee 

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021will apply judgement in making such decisions, specifically in 
relation to threats to independence and objectivity resulting 
from the provision of such services and any safeguards in 
place to eliminate or reduce these threats.

The total fees payable to the Group’s external auditor in 
respect of the year under review amount to £210,500  
(FY 20: £233,0001). No non-audit services were provided in 
FY 21 (FY 20: £nil). 

One of the principal duties of the Audit Committee is to 
make recommendations to the Group Board in relation to 
the appointment of the external auditor. PwC has been the 
Company’s external auditor for many years and in line with 
best practice guidance as a listed plc is required to rotate 
the Senior Statutory Auditor (audit engagement partner) 
responsible for the Group and subsidiary audits every five 
years. The Group’s current Senior Statutory Auditor was 
identified as such in October 2020.

The respective responsibilities of the Directors and external 
auditor in connection with the Group financial statements are 
explained in the Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities on 
page 84 and the Auditor’s Reports on pages 85-89. 

Review of external auditor’s effectiveness
The Committee reviewed the external auditor’s 
performance and independence, by considering the 
qualifications, expertise and resources of PwC and its 
objectivity on an ongoing basis throughout the year. This 
was done by considering the following:
- 

 the views of the Executive Directors; 

-  responses from PwC to questions from the Committee; 

- 

- 

 the audit findings reported to the Committee, including 
PwC’s report on internal quality procedures; and

 the relationship with PwC as a whole, to confirm there 
are no relationships between the external auditor and 
the Company other than in the ordinary course of 
business which could adversely affect independence and 
objectivity.

Furthermore, during the year, the Group formally adopted a 
policy for the appointment of former employees of the 
external auditor, which requires written approval from the 
Chair, CFO and Head of the Audit Committee, should the 
Group wish to hire any employee who has been involved in 
the audit within the last two years. No such appointments 
have been made during the year. 

Based on the reviews performed, the Committee is satisfied 
that the external audit process has operated effectively, 
and PwC continued to bring independence and prove 
effective in its role as external auditor. 

Internal control and risk management
As explained in more detail in the Risk Management section 
of the Strategic report on page 45, the Committee 
supports the Group Board in reviewing the Group’s risk 
management methodology and the effectiveness and 
integrity of the Company’s internal control and risk 
management systems. Regular internal control updates are 
provided to the Committee, which include reviewing and 
updating the nature and extent of principal risks and 
uncertainties faced by the Group contained in the Group’s 
risk register and assessing the mitigating actions in place 
and updates to action plans agreed in previous meetings. 
The Committee discussed and reviewed the Group’s risk 
register twice in FY 21, focusing on climate change, the 
pandemic, cyber security and the corporate criminal 
offence. On each occasion it concluded that all risks and 
opportunities had been appropriately identified and 
recommended the Group’s risk register to the Group Board 
for approval.

Internal audit
On an annual basis, the Committee considers and approves 
the proposed annual internal audit and risk plan for the full 
year. The Committee is kept up to date by the CFO and the 
Group Financial Controller on progress against the Group’s 
internal audit and risk plan. 

The Committee considers annually whether there is a need 
for a separate internal audit and risk function and makes a 
recommendation to the Group Board accordingly. The 
Group does not currently have a formal internal audit 
function. Targeted reviews and visits to operations are 
performed by the Head Office Finance team, which is 
independent of the business operations and which 
comprises wholly of qualified accountants. The team is 
responsible for reviewing and reporting on the effectiveness 
of internal controls and risk management systems. This 
approach is considered appropriate and proportionate for 
the size of the Group’s operations and does not affect the 
work of the external auditor. 

Risk and compliance policies
In line with the theme of trust, ethics, transparency and 
delivery of good corporate governance, the responsibility of 
the Audit Committee in the management and 
communication of risks and internal controls extends 
beyond matters of financial, operational and strategic risk. 
As such, the Audit Committee considers the Company’s 
attitude towards areas such as ethics, anti-bribery, 
corruption, modern slavery, market abuse prevention and 
whistleblowing. 

1 Audit related services in FY 20 included £50,000 of over-runs agreed by the Committee in respect of the FY 19 audit. This was explained in the Annual Report and Accounts 
2020.

69

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021Audit Committee report

During Q4 21, the Committee conducted a review of the 
following Group level risk and compliance polices adopted 
at IPO to ensure that they were up to date and remained fit 
for purpose. Where required, these were updated to 
reflect best practice and all were recommended to the 
Group Board for approval:
• Anti-bribery and corruption policy - the zero-tolerance 
approach to bribery and corruption outlined in this policy 
reflects the Group’s commitment to act honestly, 
professionally, fairly and with integrity in all business 
dealings and relationships. This policy is designed to 
ensure adherence to the provisions of the Bribery Act 
2010 and to take account of “Business Principles for 
Countering Bribery” published by Transparency 
International. This also covers corporate gifts and 
hospitality, and appropriate business ethics. Compliance 
with this policy is confirmed annually by the Group’s 
management teams.

• Whistleblowing policy – the support and encouragement 
provided to employees and stakeholders to raise issues or 
concerns in respect of conduct within the organisation 
that could fall below expected standards without fear of 
recrimination, victimisation or suffering a disadvantage of 
any kind as outlined in this policy reflects the Group’s 
commitment to high standards of honesty, openness, 
integrity and accountability. This policy promotes a culture 
of openness and ensures that everyone knows how to 
raise a concern. Any matters raised through the 
whistleblowing process are reported to the Committee. 
Where a matter is raised, a proportionate investigation is 
undertaken by independent management with support and 
guidance from the Committee as necessary. The Group is 
pleased to report that no incidents were reported during 
the year.

• Anti-slavery and human trafficking policy – the 

responsibilities of our businesses to implement and 
enforce effective systems and controls to ensure that 
modern slavery is not taking place anywhere in our own 

businesses or in any of our businesses’ supply chains as 
outlined in this policy reflects the Group’s zero-tolerance 
approach to modern slavery, exploitation and violation of 
fundamental human rights. Adherence to these principles 
is addressed through staff induction, ongoing training and 
communications. Suppliers are required to comply with 
our policies on these matters with compliance enforced 
through robust vendor audits, supplier visits and ongoing 
training. 

• Group wide dealing policy and share dealing code – 

these policies are designed to ensure that Directors and 
employees do not misuse, or place themselves under 
suspicion of misusing, information about the Group which 
is not public and they support compliance with the 
applicable regulatory framework on market abuse.

Additionally, in the wake of the pandemic, Brexit and 
resulting changes to operations, together with an evolving 
financial crime environment, the Audit Committee initiated 
a project to review the Group’s approach to the corporate 
offence of failure to prevent facilitation of tax evasion, 
introduced by the Criminal Finances Act 2017. The Group 
Executive Committee developed a project plan to refresh 
the Group’s risk assessment on this and to ensure that 
‘prevention procedures’ remained up to date and fit for 
purpose. External advisers were engaged in Q1 22 to 
support this work and the output was reported back to the 
Audit Committee.

Yvonne Monaghan
Chair of the Audit Committee
22 March 2022

70

CORPORATE GOVERNANCEThe Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021Remuneration report

Ensuring key personnel deliver 
the Company’s objectives.

This report is for the year ended 31 December 
2021. It sets out the remuneration policy and the 
detailed remuneration for the Executive and 
Non-executive Directors of the Company. As an 
AIM-quoted company, the information is 
disclosed to fulfil the requirements of AIM Rule 
19. The Pebble Group plc is not required to 
comply with the Large and Medium-sized 
Companies and Groups (Accounts and Reports) 
(Amendment) Regulations 2013. The information 
is unaudited except where stated.

Dear shareholder,
I am pleased to introduce the Directors’ Remuneration 
Report for the 2021 financial year. This letter introduces the 
report, outlines the major decisions on Directors’ 
remuneration during the year and explains the context in 
which these decisions have been taken.

The Pebble Group plc is committed to high standards of 
corporate governance and our policy and disclosures on 
Directors’ remuneration are intended to reflect this 
approach. Through this report, we aim to provide 
shareholders with the necessary information to understand 
our remuneration strategy and how it links with Group 
performance and we welcome shareholder feedback on 
these matters. To reflect our positive approach to good 
corporate governance and to promote engagement 
between the Remuneration Committee and our 
shareholders, we will put this Directors’ Remuneration 
Report to an advisory vote at the 2022 AGM, as we did at 
the 2021 AGM. At our 2021 AGM, this resolution was 
supported by 99.5% of votes cast (no votes withheld).

71

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021Remuneration report

Remuneration policy
The Company’s approach to remuneration is that the overall 
package should be sufficiently attractive to recruit, 
motivate and retain individuals of a high calibre with 
significant technical and strategic expertise. The 
remuneration policy ensures that key personnel are 
incentivised and rewarded in a way that is aligned to 
delivery of the Company’s long-term growth objectives 
which in turn achieves a Group culture that will support our 
strategic goals. I believe the interests of key personnel are 
resultingly aligned with those of our shareholders.

The remuneration policy adopted by the Company has four 
main elements, base salary, benefits, annual performance 
related bonuses and long-term share incentives. Policy in 
each area is detailed in this report. 

I believe that there is a clear link between variable pay and 
operational and financial performance and I consider all 
performance metrics used to be stretching and aligned with 
our strategy and business model. During the year, the 
Committee considered inclusion of ESG-related criteria to 
determine variable pay, however this has not been adopted 
to date. I intend to keep this under review noting that such 
criteria, if introduced, must be as rigorous as other financial 
or operational targets and meaningful to our businesses.

Performance and decisions on remuneration taken 
during 2021
Company performance during the year was focused on 
meeting two objectives: 
• continuing to invest in, and show progress against, the 
medium-term growth plan for Facilisgroup, targeting  
$50 million of Annual Recurring Revenue by the end of 
2024; and 

• demonstrating the ability of Brand Addition to make an 

immediate recovery to FY 19 revenue levels following the 
impact of the COVID 19 pandemic on the business during 
FY 20.

Details of progress against these objectives have been 
provided throughout the Strategic Report on pages 2-49.

In the context of these objectives and against the backdrop 
of 2020 where Company performance was impacted by 
COVID 19, the following remuneration decisions were made 
by the Remuneration Committee:
• the base salary for each of the CEO and CFO, of £270,000 

and £200,000 respectively, was not changed and 
remained at the level set at IPO in 2019;

• the fees for the Chair and other Non-executive Directors 
were not changed and remained at the level set at IPO in 
2019;

• an Annual Bonus Plan for Executive Directors was 

approved in 2021. The plan was subject to performance 
targets based solely on the Group’s financial results, using 
the Adjusted EBITDA performance. (Details of the level 
achieved against target are summarised later in this 
report);

• the recurring annual award under the Long Term Incentive 

Plan (LTIP) was made on 8 June 2021; and

• the first implementation of the Group Sharesave Plan 
(SAYE) was approved and options were granted on  
6 October 2021.

Information on how remuneration will be operated in 2022 
is set out at the end of this report.

I hope that you find the report helpful and informative, and 
I look forward to receiving feedback from you on the 
information presented.

Stuart Warriner
Remuneration Committee Chair
22 March 2022

72

CORPORATE GOVERNANCEThe Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021Composition of Committee
The Committee comprises all three independent Non-
executive Directors, Stuart Warriner (Chair), Yvonne Monaghan 
and Richard Law and is supported by Lucy Penfold as Company 
Secretary. The Committee will normally meet four times a year 
to review the remuneration of the Executive Directors and 
other Executive Team members. The views of the Chief 
Executive are sought in respect of awards to the other 
Executive Director and Executive Team members.

Evaluation of the effectiveness of the 
Remuneration Committee
To ensure that it is operating at maximum effectiveness, the 
Committee used output of the formal Group Board 
Effectiveness review detailed on page 61 to review and 
evaluate its own performance, constitution and Terms of 
Reference during Q4 21. It concluded that the Committee 
was operating effectively, and no action or changes were 
required to be recommended to the Group Board. No 
issues arose from the Terms of Reference which were 
re-approved by the Group Board without amendment.

Remuneration policy
The Committee’s overall approach is focused on ensuring 
the Company’s remuneration policy is aligned with 
shareholders’ interests whilst also enabling the Company to 
attract, retain and motivate high quality executive 
management. It is intended that this policy conforms with 
best practice standards. 

The key objectives of the Company’s remuneration policy 
are to:
• align Executive and shareholder interests;
• underpin an effective pay-for-performance culture; 
• support retention, motivation and recruitment of talented 

people; and

• be clear, consistent and easy to understand. 
The Committee aims to achieve an appropriate balance 
between fixed and variable remuneration, and between 
variable remuneration based on short-term and longer-term 
performance. Fixed remuneration includes base salary and 
benefits. Variable remuneration includes annual bonus and 
awards made under the Long Term Incentive Plan. In addition 

to this, the Executive Directors are required to build and 
maintain a minimum shareholding in The Pebble Group plc 
shares, details of which are provided in the table below. 

The structure of executive remuneration is in line with that of 
many established UK quoted companies balancing fixed 
remuneration, annual bonus and long-term performance share 
awards. Approximately 57% of the potential remuneration of 
the Executive Directors is subject to the achievement of 
performance targets. The link of remuneration outcomes to 
long-term performance is primarily through the Long Term 
Incentive Plan which has stretching targets based on basic 
adjusted earnings per share (EPS) and total shareholder return 
(TSR), and a two-year post-vesting holding period is applied. 
The Committee recognises the risk of target-based plans and 
addresses this risk through careful consideration in the choice 
and pitching of performance targets, the ability to exercise 
discretion, the attachment of malus and clawback provisions to 
Long Term Incentive Plan awards and the application of a 
shareholding guideline. In the light of this remuneration 
structure and the substantial shareholdings of both the CEO 
and CFO, the Committee is satisfied that the Executive 
Directors are well aligned with the long-term performance of 
the Company. 

The Committee will take into account periodic external 
comparisons to examine current market trends and 
practices at equivalent roles in similar companies. 
Additionally, in making its decisions in 2021 the Committee 
also consulted external consultants h2glenfern 
Remuneration Advisory Limited (H2glenfern), where 
appropriate, to provide advice on best practice and market 
trends. H2glenfern is a member of the UK Remuneration 
Consultants Group (RCG) and has confirmed that it 
complies with the RCG Code. H2glenfern has no other 
relationship with the Company and the Committee is 
satisfied that the advice it receives is independent and 
objective. The Committee instructed h2glenfern to carry 
out benchmarking for executive and non-executive 
remuneration during Q4 21.

This part of the report sets out the remuneration policy 
with regard to the Executive Directors. The policy on each 
element of remuneration and how it operates is detailed in 
the table:

73

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021Remuneration report

Elements of Remuneration

Element

Base Salary

Benefits

Link to remuneration 
policy/strategy

To help recruit and 
retain high 
performing Executive 
Directors.

Reflects the 
individual’s 
experience, role and 
importance to the 
business.

To help recruit and 
retain high 
performing Executive 
Directors. 

To provide market 
competitive benefits.

Pension

Annual 
Bonus

To help recruit and 
retain high 
performing Executive 
Directors. 

To provide market 
competitive pensions.

To incentivise and 
reward performance.

To align the interests 
of the Executives and 
shareholders in the 
short and medium 
term.

74

Operation

Maximum opportunity

Performance metric

Base salary is reviewed 
annually as at 1 January with 
reference to each Executive 
Director’s performance and 
contribution during the year, 
company performance, the 
scope of the Executive 
Directors’ responsibilities and 
consideration of competitive 
pressures.

There is no prescribed 
maximum annual base 
salary or salary increase. 

The Committee is 
guided by the general 
increase for the broader 
employee population 
but has discretion to 
decide on a lower or a 
higher increase.

The Committee considers 
individual and Company 
performance when setting 
base salary.

Benefits are in line with those 
offered to other senior 
management employees and 
may include medical expenses 
cover and life insurance cover.

The CEO and CFO also receive 
permanent health insurance 
cover and a Company car, the 
value of which is equivalent to 
5% of base salary per annum. 

The Company car is provided 
to Executive Directors as an 
alternative to an employer’s 
pension contribution.

Employer’s pension 
contribution or a cash 
supplement.

The CEO and CFO have opted 
to take a Company car 
contribution as an alternative 
to an employer’s pension 
contribution.

The Annual Bonus is earned by 
the achievement of one-year 
performance targets set by the 
Remuneration Committee. The 
parameters, performance 
criteria, weightings and targets 
are ordinarily set at the start of 
each financial year. 

Payments are made in cash 
following completion of the 
year subject to the 
Committee’s assessment of 
performance against targets 
and other matters it deems 
relevant.
Awards are subject to malus 
and clawback provisions. 

None

No maximum potential 
value other than 
Company car, the value 
of which is capped at 
5% of base salary per 
annum where provided 
as an alternative to an 
employer’s pension 
contribution.

None

5% of base salary, which 
is aligned with the 
pension contribution 
made by the Company 
to its UK workforce.

The maximum bonus 
opportunity for the CEO 
and CFO is 100% of base 
salary.

Performance measures may 
include financial, non-
financial, personal and 
strategic objectives. 

Performance criteria and 
weightings may be changed 
from year to year. 

At present, the 
performance targets are 
based on Adjusted EBITDA 
which is considered by the 
committee to be the 
Group’s key financial 
performance indicator.

CORPORATE GOVERNANCEThe Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021Element

Long Term 
Incentive 
Plan

Link to remuneration 
policy/strategy

To incentivise and 
reward long-term 
performance and 
value creation. 

To align the interests 
of Executive 
Directors and 
shareholders in the 
long-term.

All employee 
share plan

Shareholding 
requirement

To encourage all 
employees to make a 
long-term investment 
in the Company’s 
shares in a tax 
efficient way

Encourages Executive 
Directors to achieve 
the Company’s 
long- term strategy 
and create 
sustainable 
stakeholder value

Aligns with 
shareholder interests

Operation

Maximum opportunity

Performance metric

The annual award to the 
CEO and CFO is normally 
100% of base salary.

Performance measures may 
include financial and total 
shareholder return 
(TSR)-based targets. 
Performance criteria and 
weightings may be changed 
from year to year. 

For awards made in FY 20 
and FY 21, 70% of the award 
was subject to a cumulative 
basic earnings per share 
(EPS) target and 30% was 
subject to an absolute TSR 
target. 

Details are set out later in 
this report.

The maximum 
participation level will be 
aligned to HMRC limits.

None

Executive Directors are 
eligible to receive awards 
under the Long Term Incentive 
Plan at the discretion of the 
Committee. 

Awards are granted as nil-cost 
options or conditional awards 
which vest after three years 
subject to the meeting of 
objective performance 
conditions specified at award. 

Awards are subject to malus 
and clawback provisions. 

An additional holding period 
of two years post vesting is 
applied to awards made to the 
Executive Directors. 

Dividend equivalents may be 
added to awards. 

The Executive Directors may 
participate in the Group 
Sharesave Plan (SAYE) on the 
same terms as other eligible 
employees.

200% of salary. 

The shareholdings of the CEO 
and CFO are currently well in 
excess of this guideline.

Non-
executive 
Director 
remuneration

To provide fees 
appropriate to time 
commitments and 
responsibilities of 
each role.

Non-executive Directors are 
paid a base fee in cash. Fees 
are reviewed periodically. In 
addition, reasonable business 
expenses maybe reimbursed.

The Group Board is 
guided by the general 
increase for the broader 
employee population 
and takes into account 
relevant market 
movements.

75

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021Remuneration report

Malus and clawback
Both Annual Bonus and Long Term Incentive Plan awards are 
subject to malus and clawback provisions covering two 
years. Reasons for malus and clawback being applied would 
include material misstatement in audited results, discovery 
of errors or inaccuracies in the assessment of any 
performance condition, fraud or gross misconduct, events 
or behaviour which lead to the censure of the Group by a 
regulatory authority or have a significant detrimental impact 
on the reputation of the Group. 

Remuneration of employees below the Group Board
Employees below the Group Board receive base salary, 
benefits, annual bonus, and senior staff are invited to 
participate in the Long Term Incentive plan. 

Pay and conditions throughout the Group are taken into 
consideration when setting remuneration policy. The 
Committee does not consult other employees when setting 
executive remuneration. 

Shareholder consultation
The Committee’s policy is to consult with major 
shareholders in respect of significant decisions on executive 
remuneration. 

The Chair of the Remuneration Committee is available for 
contact with investors concerning the Company’s approach 
to remuneration. The annual report on remuneration will be 
put to an advisory vote at the upcoming AGM in 2022. 

Executive Directors’ service contracts and 
payments for loss of office
Our Executive Directors have rolling service contracts dated 
28 November 2019 with an indefinite term, but a fixed 
period of 12 months’ notice of termination. Our approach 
to remuneration in each of the circumstances in which an 
Executive Director may leave is determined by the 
Remuneration Committee in accordance with the rules of 
any applicable scheme. 

Non-executive Directors’ letters of appointment
The Non-executive Directors do not have service contracts 
but instead have letters of appointment dated 28 
November 2019 which contain a three-month notice period. 

Consideration of new Executive Directors or senior 
executives
When recruiting or promoting any senior executive, we seek 
to apply consistent policies on fixed and variable 
remuneration components in line with the remuneration 
policy set out above. This helps to ensure that any new 
Executive Directors or senior executive is on the same 
remuneration footing as existing Executive Directors or 
senior executives respectively, while still taking into account 
the skill and experience of the individual, the market rate 
for a candidate of that experience and the importance of 
securing the relevant individual.

Annual report on remuneration
This section sets out details of remuneration in 2021.

2021 Summary of Directors’ total remuneration (audited)*

Name

Executive
Christopher Lee

Claire Thomson

Non-executive
Richard Law

Yvonne Monaghan

Stuart Warriner

Salary/Fee

Bonus

Pension

Benefits**

Total

£270,000

£114,750

£200,000

£85,000

£100,000

£45,000

£45,000

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

£14,687

£399,437

£11,579

£296,579

-

-

-

£100,000

£45,000

£45,000

* Executive Directors’ salary and Non-executive Directors’ fees in 2021 were unchanged from 2020. The difference in total remuneration 
paid is due to the 40% reduction that was agreed in 2020, as noted in the table below. 

** Car lease and private medical insurance.

76

CORPORATE GOVERNANCEThe Pebble Group plc Annual Report 20212020 Summary of Directors’ total remuneration (audited)* 

Name

Executive
Christopher Lee

Claire Thomson

Non-executive
Richard Law

Yvonne Monaghan

Stuart Warriner

Salary/fee

Bonus

Pension

Benefits**

Total

£222,252

£165,246

£80,777

£36,350

£36,350

£0

£0

-

-

-

£4,499

£5,345

£11,590

£238,341

£9,174

£179,765

-

-

-

-

-

-

£80,777

£36,350

£36,350

* In response to the COVID-19 pandemic, Executive Directors and Non-executive Directors agreed to a 40% reduction in base salary and 
fees, respectively. This reduction was in place for the 6-month period from 1 April to 30 September 2020. 

2021 annual bonus awards 
No annual bonus plan operated in respect of 2020. For 2021, the maximum potential bonus was 100% of base salary. The 
awards were subject to performance targets based solely on the Group’s financial results, using the Adjusted EBITDA 
performance, which is considered by the Remuneration Committee to be the Group’s key performance measure. No bonus 
is payable for below threshold performance but increases on a straight-line basis from 25% pay-out at threshold, to 60% 
pay-out at target performance, to 100% pay-out at maximum. 

The Company achieved adjusted EBITDA of £15.4m in FY 21 which corresponded to a pay out at 42.5% of maximum for 
each Executive Director, as shown in the table above.

Long Term Incentive Plan (LTIP)
Long term incentive awards were granted to the CEO and CFO on 8 June 2021. The table below summarises the awards 
made to the Executive Directors under the plan.

Name and award date

Christopher Lee
21 December 2020

8 June 2021

Claire Thomson
21 December 2020

8 June 2021

Interest at
31 December 
2020

Granted
in year*

Vested

Exercised

Lapsed

Interest at
31 December 
2021

Performance
period ending

242,152

179,372

176,471

130,719

-

-

-

-

-

-

242,152

30 June 2023

176,471

31 December 2023

179,372

30 June 2023

130,719

31 December 2023

Nil cost awards with performance conditions as at 31 December 2021. 
* The value at Grant Date was calculated based on the closing share price on 8 June 2021 of 1.529p per share. Each of the awards 
represents an LTIP award over shares worth 100% of annual salary as at the Grant Date.

Performance conditions

2021 award 70% cumulative adjusted
basic EPS and 30% TSR

2020 award 70% cumulative adjusted
basic EPS and 30% TSR

Cumulative basic adjusted EPS
Basic adjusted EPS as defined in 
the LTIP rules, excludes share 
based payment costs, exceptional 
items and amortisation from 
acquired intangibles

Cumulative basic adjusted EPS for the three 
years ended 31 December 2023
Threshold (25% of maximum vesting) 15.4p
Mid-range (60% of maximum vesting) 16.3p
Maximum (100% of maximum vesting) 17.3p

Cumulative basic adjusted EPS for the three 
years ended 30 June 2023
Threshold (25% of maximum vesting) 13.4p
Mid-range (60% of maximum vesting) 14.3p
Maximum (100% of maximum vesting) 15.1p

Annualised TSR
Annualised growth in total 
shareholder returns

Threshold 8% pa (25% maximum vesting
Mid-range 11.3% pa (60% maximum vesting)
Maximum 15% pa (100% maximum vesting)

Threshold 8% pa (25% maximum vesting)
Mid-range 11.3% pa (60% maximum vesting)
Maximum 15% pa (100% maximum vesting)

Performance between these levels is determined on a straight-line basis.

77

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021Remuneration report

The performance period for the 2020 awards (being the three years ending 30 June 2023) was chosen as the timing of the 
2020 awards was deferred to December 2020.

The performance period for the 2021 awards (being the three years ending 31 December 2023) was chosen to align back 
with the financial year.

The charge for share based payments is detailed in note 24 to the accounts.

Group Sharesave Plan (SAYE) participation
Christopher Lee and Claire Thomson elected to participate in the 2021 Sharesave plan launched in September 2021 to the 
maximum amount offered to staff under the plan. As such, they were awarded options as detailed below. The exercise 
price for these awards is 122 pence per Share, representing a 20% discount to the closing market price of 152.50 pence 
per Share on 13 September 2021, being the trading day before the invitation for eligible employees to participate was 
made.

Name

Christopher Lee

Claire Thomson

Award date

6 Oct 2021

6 Oct 2021

Granted
in year

Exercise
price

Contract
start date

14,754

14,754

122p 1 Dec 2021

122p 1 Dec 2021

Option
exercisable

1 Dec 2024

1 Dec 2024

Annual General Meeting
The Committee was pleased that at the Company’s AGM held on 3 June 2021, 99.5% of votes cast were in favour of the 
resolution to approve the Directors’ Remuneration Report (no votes withheld). 

Director’s interests in shares
The interests of the Directors as at 31 December 2021 and 2020 in the shares of the Company were:

Name

Richard Law

Christopher Lee

Claire Thomson

Yvonne Monaghan

Stuart Warriner*

31 December 2021

31 December 2020

Number

370,041

6,091,515

2,907,243

55,000

50,000

% of issued 
shares

0.22%

3.64%

1.74%

0.03%

0.03%

Number

239,963

6,091,515

2,907,243

35,000

50,000

% of issued 
shares

0.14%

3.64%

1.74%

0.02%

0.03%

* Stuart Warriner increased his shareholding to 95,000 shares on 19 January 2022, which increased his percentage of issued shares held 
to 0.06%.

78

CORPORATE GOVERNANCEThe Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021Directors remuneration for the year commencing 1 January 2022
Executive Directors
At IPO in December 2019, the salaries of the CEO and CFO were set using the median level of pay determined by an 
independent remuneration expert, based on a cohort of peer companies by market capitalisation and sector. The 
Committee regards that considering median remains a reasonable approach for the Group to attract and retain 
appropriately qualified and high calibre individuals to set and implement the Group’s strategy. In Q4 21 executive salaries 
were reviewed for the first time since IPO and the benchmarking exercise carried out by h2glenfern (noted above) 
indicated that both CEO and CFO base salaries were below market median levels. The Committee considered addressing 
this to align 2022 base salary, again focusing on paying at a median level. However, given wider stakeholder considerations 
in the context of the Group’s stage on its growth journey, the Committee determined to limit the increase in the salaries of 
our CEO and CFO to 5.5% and 5.0% of salary respectively, aligned with the approach adopted across the wider Group. In 
making this decision, the Committee was cognisant of the need to ensure that executive remuneration remains fair and 
competitive, and the Committee agreed that it may be appropriate for future base salary increases to include a greater 
percentage uplift, if both the Company and individual performance merited that.

Name

Christopher Lee

Claire Thomson

Role

CEO

CFO

2022 annual bonus awards 
The annual bonus plan for 2022 will operate in a similar way to 2021. 

Base salary
2022

Base salary
2021

285 000

210,000

270,000

200,000

Long Term Incentive Plan for 2022
Long-term incentive awards are planned for March 2022 and will operate as set out in the policy table above. Awards will be 
subject to three-year performance conditions and a two year holding period for vested awards.

Non-executive Directors 

Name

Role

Committee Chair

Richard Law

Chair of the Group Board

Nomination

Yvonne Monaghan

Non-executive Director

Audit

Stuart Warriner

Non-executive Director

Remuneration

Annual Fee
2022

Annual Fee
2021

£100,000

£100,000

£45,000

£45,000

£45,000

£45,000

79

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021Directors’ report
For the year ended 31 December 2021

The Directors present their report together with the 
audited Group Financial Statements of The Pebble Group 
plc (the “Company”) for the year ended 31 December 2021.

Principal Activities and Business Overview
The Company is incorporated and domiciled in the UK with 
company number 12231361 and with its registered office 
address at Broadway House, Trafford Wharf Road, Trafford 
Park, Manchester, United Kingdom M17 1DD. The Company is 
a public limited company admitted to trading on the AIM 
market of the London Stock Exchange. 

The principal activities and business overview of the Group 
are set out on pages 4-11 within the Strategic Report which 
is incorporated by reference and forms part of this 
Directors’ Report. 

Business review and future developments
A review of the performance of the Company during the year, 
including principal risks and uncertainties, key performance 
indicators and comments on future developments is given in 
the Strategic Report on pages 38-40.

Results and dividends
The Group recorded revenue in the year of £115.1m (FY 20: 
£82.4m) and profit after tax of £7.3m (FY 20: £4.1m). No 
interim dividend has been paid in the year (FY 20: £nil). 

The Group’s previously stated dividend policy is to make 
dividend payments of c.30% of profit after tax. This policy 
remains in place. However, as we continue to believe the 
opportunities ahead of us remain significant, in particular 
planned investment into Facilisgroup, we have taken the 
decision to retain cash in the business and the Directors do 
not recommend the payment of a final dividend (FY20: nil). 
The timing of implementing our stated dividend policy will 
be considered again against the Group’s half year 2022 
progress and an update provided at that time.

Financial risk management
Information relating to the principal risks and uncertainties 
of the Group has been included within the Strategic Report 
on pages 45-49. Further information relating to the financial 
risk of the Group has been included within note 23, financial 
risk management.

Going concern
In assessing the appropriateness of adopting the going 
concern basis in the preparation of these financial 
statements, the Directors have prepared cash flow 
forecasts and projections for the two years ending  
31 December 2023. Following careful consideration of the 
base case forecasts and the application of severe but 
plausible downside scenarios to these forecasts, the 
Directors have a reasonable expectation that the Group has 
adequate resources to continue to operate within the level 
of its current facilities for a period of at least 12 months 
from the date of this Report. Therefore, the Directors 

continue to adopt the going concern basis of accounting in 
preparing the Group and Company financial statements.

Further details on going concern are provided in note 2 of 
the Group financial statements which is incorporated by 
reference and forms part of this Directors’ Report.

Directors and their interests 
The Directors of the Company who were in office during the 
year and up to the date of signing the Group financial 
statements were:

Richard Law 

Christopher Lee 

Claire Thomson 

Yvonne Monaghan  

Stuart Warriner 

In accordance with the Articles of Association, a third of the 
Group Board are required to stand for re-election at the 
forthcoming AGM; and any Director who has not been 
re-elected at one of the two previous AGMs is to be 
proposed for re-election. However, in line with the decision 
made in advance of the 2021 AGM, the Group Board has 
again decided that all Directors would retire and seek 
re-election by the Company’s shareholders at the 2022 
AGM. The Directors confirm that having conducted a 
performance evaluation, each Director continues to 
contribute and demonstrate commitment to their role.

The Directors who held office during the year and as at 31 
December 2021 had the following interests in the Ordinary 
shares of the Company:

Name of Director

Richard Law

Christopher Lee

Claire Thomson

Yvonne Monaghan

Stuart Warriner*

Number

370,041

6,091,515

2,907,243

55,000

50,000

* Stuart Warriner increased his shareholding to 95,000 shares on 19 
January 2022, which increased his percentage of issued shares 
held to 0.06%.
In addition to the interest in Ordinary shares shown above, 
the Group operates a Long Term Incentive Plan (LTIP) for 
senior executives, under which awards may be granted over 
shares in the Company. The maximum number of Ordinary 
shares which could be issued to Directors in the future 
under such awards as at 31 December 2021 is shown below: 

Name of Director

Christopher Lee

Claire Thomson

Number

418,623

310,091

80

CORPORATE GOVERNANCEThe Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021 
 
 
 
The Group also operates a Group Sharesave Plan (SAYE) for 
all employees which Executive Directors may elect to 
participate in. The maximum number of Ordinary shares 
which could be issued to Directors in the future under such 
awards as at 31 December 2021 is shown below: 

Name of Director

Christopher Lee

Claire Thomson

Number

14,754

14,754

The market price of the Company’s shares at the end of the 
financial year was 132.50p (31 December 2020: 130.0p) and 
the range of market prices during the year ended 31 
December 2021 was between 120.0p and 160.0p.

Further details on related party transactions with Directors 
are provided in note 26 of the Group financial statements.

Directors’ insurance
The Company maintains Directors’ and Officers’ liability 
insurance for the Directors, which was in force during the 
full year 2021 and remains in force as at the date of this 
report.

Significant shareholdings
As at 21 March 2022, the Company has been advised, in 
accordance with the Disclosure and Transparency Rules of 
the Financial Conduct Authority of the following notifiable 
interests in 3% or more of its voting rights.

Name of Shareholder

Number Percentage

Liontrust Asset Management

 33,229,313 

19.8%

BlackRock Investment Management 

 22,285,903 

13.3%

FIL Investments International

Capital International, UK 

Amati Global Investors

Aegon N.V.

 16,405,563 

 13,469,171 

 10,712,614 

 8,270,615 

River and Mercantile Asset Management

 6,907,300 

Christopher Lee

Janus Henderson Investors

Chelverton Asset Management

 6,091,515 

 5,305,924 

 5,227,500 

9.8%

8.0%

6.4%

4.9%

4.1%

3.6%

3.2%

3.1%

Employees
The Group regularly provides employees with information 
on matters of concern to them, consulting them or their 
representatives regularly so that their views can be taken 
into account when making decisions that are likely to affect 
their interests. Employee involvement in the Group is 
encouraged, as common goals and awareness of the 
Group’s strategy play a major role in delivering its strategic 
objectives (see listening to our stakeholders pages 18-21. 
Second awards under the Group’s Long Term Incentive Plan 
were made on 8 June 2021 in which 57 senior staff across 
the Group participated. In addition to this, the first 
implementation of the Group Sharesave Plan (SAYE) was 
approved and options were granted to 127 employees under 

the main plan and to 48 employees under the international 
plan on 6 October 2021, with an option price of £1.22. 

The Group recognises its responsibility to employ disabled 
persons in suitable employment and gives full and fair 
consideration to such persons, including any employee who 
becomes disabled, having regard to their particular 
aptitudes and abilities. Where practicable, disabled 
employees are treated equally with all other employees in 
respect of their eligibility for training, career development 
and promotion. For further information on the Group’s DEI 
policy please see page 31.

Further details on how the Company communicates with its 
teams as a key stakeholder group and has regard to their 
interests can be found within the Strategic Report on 
pages 18-25.

Statement on Engagement with Stakeholders
Investing in and developing our stakeholder relationships is 
central to our Group values. We believe the success of our 
strategy depends on our ability to foster effective business 
relationships with all of our stakeholders. Their interests are 
important to us and we are committed to maintaining 
strong, positive relationships with them, built on a 
foundation of mutual respect, trust and understanding. 
Further information on our stakeholder engagement can be 
found within our Strategic Report on pages 18-21 and also in 
our Section 172(1) statement on pages 22-25 where we 
provide a high-level overview of how we engage with our 
stakeholders.

Political donations
It is the Company’s policy not to make political donations. 
The Directors confirm that no donations for political 
purposes were made during the year (2020: nil).

Share capital and voting
The Company has one class of equity share, 1p Ordinary 
shares, with full voting, dividend and capital distribution 
rights, including on winding up. They are non-redeemable. 
The rights and obligations attaching to these shares are 
governed by the Companies Act 2006 and the Company’s 
Articles.

As at 31 December 2021, the Company’s issued share capital 
comprised: 167,450,893 Ordinary shares of 1p.

Off-market purchase of Deferred shares by the 
Company
The Company had a second class of share, 1p Deferred 
shares, which had arisen from the operation at the time of 
the Company’s IPO of a share ratchet which appeared in 
the Company’s articles of association in force during the 
period immediately prior to IPO. The Deferred shares 
carried very limited rights (no voting, dividend or other 
distribution rights). As the stated intention from their 
creation upon IPO was that they would be purchased in 
their entirety by the Company, on 3 June 2021 a special 
resolution was passed by shareholders at the 2021 AGM, to 

81

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021Directors’ report
For the year ended 31 December 2021

approve the off-market purchase of 12,564,501 Deferred 
shares of 1p each in the capital of the Company (being all of 
the shares of that class in issue at that time) by the 
Company from the eight holders of those shares, in 
consideration of the payment of £1 to each of such holders, 
being £8 in aggregate. Completion of that purchase took 
place immediately after the conclusion of the AGM, at 
which time the 12,564,501 Deferred shares of 1p each in the 
capital of the Company were cancelled. 

Shareholders’ Authority for the Purchase by the 
Company of its own Shares 
At the 2021 AGM, Shareholders authorised the Company to 
make market purchases of up to a maximum number of 
Ordinary shares of 16,745,000, which represented 
approximately 10% of the Company’s issued Ordinary share 
capital on the latest practicable date prior to publication of 
the 2021 Notice of Annual General Meeting. The minimum 
price allowed for such purchases is nominal value and the 
maximum is 5% above the average of the middle market 
quotations for such shares for the five business days 
immediately preceding the day of purchase. The Directors 
intend to seek renewal of this authority, which is due to 
expire at the conclusion of the 2022 AGM. Further details 
are given in the 2022 Notice of Annual General Meeting.

Appointment and replacement of Directors and 
changes to constitution
New Articles of Association were adopted by special 
resolution passed by shareholders at the 2021 AGM on  
3 June 2021. The principal changes were:
(i) 

 removal of all references to Deferred shares, given the 
purchase and cancellation of those shares, as described 
above;

 inclusion of express provisions allowing the Company to 
hold “hybrid” general meetings (including annual 
general meetings), enabling shareholders to attend the 
meeting either at a physical location or virtually by 
means of an electronic facility. Voting at any hybrid 
general meeting will, unless the Chair of the meeting 
directs otherwise, be decided on a poll. The new 
Articles of Association provide that a hybrid general 
meeting may be adjourned in the event of a 
technological failure. Consistent with views expressed 
by the Investment Association and Institutional 
Shareholder Services, the new Articles of Association 
do not permit general meetings to be held exclusively 
on the basis of electronic participation, so a “physical” 
meeting will still be required in all cases. The provisions 
regarding hybrid general meetings are intended to 
provide the board with flexibility to reflect 
technological advances and changing shareholder 
sentiment and market practice, in particular in light of 
the COVID 19 pandemic; and

(ii) 

82

(iii)   more extensive provisions in relation to the possibility 

of “satellite” general meetings (including annual general 
meetings), held at more than one location.

The Articles of Association are available on the Company’s 
website.

Rules governing the appointment and replacement of 
Directors and those relating to the amendments of the 
Company’s Articles of Association are contained within the 
Articles of Association.

Notice of Annual General Meeting
Details of business to be conducted at this year’s AGM, are 
contained in the Notice of the Annual General Meeting 
which will be communicated to shareholders separately. It 
is the opinion of the Directors that the passing of these 
resolutions is in the best interest of the shareholders. 

Corporate governance
Our governance structure and the Group’s statement on 
corporate governance can be found in the Corporate 
Governance section of this report on pages 50-84 which is 
incorporated by reference and forms part of this Directors’ 
Report. It can also be found on the Company’s website.

Forward-looking statements 
This Annual Report contains forward-looking statements 
that involve risk and uncertainties. The Group’s actual 
results could differ materially from those estimated or 
anticipated in the forward-looking statements as a result of 
many factors. Information contained in this Annual Report 
and Accounts relating to the Company should not be relied 
upon as a guide to future performance.

Events after the end of financial year
There were no events occurring after the balance sheet 
date that require disclosing in accordance with IAS10, 
‘Events after the reporting period’.

Directors’ statement as to disclosure of 
information to external auditor 
The Directors of the Company at the date of the approval of 
this report confirm that:
• so far as each Director is aware, there is no relevant audit 
information of which the Company’s external auditor is 
unaware; and

• each Director has taken all the steps that they ought to 

have taken as a Director to make themselves aware of any 
relevant audit information and to establish that the 
Company’s external auditor is aware of that information.

CORPORATE GOVERNANCEThe Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021UK greenhouse gas emissions and energy use
Under the Companies (Directors’ Report) and Limited Liabilities Partnerships (Energy & Carbon Report) Regulations 2019, we 
are mandated to disclose our UK energy use and associated greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions. Specifically, and as a minimum, 
we are required to report those GHG emissions relating to natural gas, electricity and transport fuel as well as an intensity 
ratio, under the Streamlined Energy & Carbon Reporting (SECR) Regulations. The Greenhouse gas emissions and energy usage 
reported below relates to the Group’s UK based business operations (Brand Addition Manchester and London):

Emission data

Direct (Scope 1) – Natural gas

Indirect (Scope 2) – Purchased electricity (Location based)

Other (Scope 3) 
– Business travel in employee-owned vehicles

Total energy consumption

Total emissions

Intensity ratio kgCO2 per £m of revenue

Unit of measure

2021

2020

Variance

kgCO2e

kgCO2e

kgCO2e

kWh

kgCO2e

62,389

58,696

50,645

60,297

3,399

571,689

124,484

1,724

15,875

571,235

126,817

2,741

23%

-3%

-79%

0%

-2%

-37%

Energy Improvements
Despite being unable to make any significant savings in 2021, we remain committed to reducing carbon emissions to meet 
our long-term goals. In 2021 Brand Addition, Manchester installed five new air conditioning units to replace old aging units 
with more energy efficient models. Old lighting continued to be replaced with LED alternatives as part of ongoing 
maintenance, but no other large-scale projects were undertaken in 2021. Employees continue to be educated in the 
importance of being energy conscious when in the office to minimise energy usage. In 2022 we expect to transition the 
electricity sourced at the Brand Addition London site over to renewable electricity and use renewable gas at our Brand 
Addition Manchester office and warehouse, which will result in a significant reduction in our UK emissions. With the 
introduction of our groupwide energy reporting framework and the Scope 3 evaluation which will begin during Q1 22, we 
expect to be able to publish our full Group greenhouse gas emissions in future reports. For further details on energy 
reduction see ESG page 33.

Methodology
Brand Addition has followed the 2019 HM reporting Government guidelines and its own internal ISO50001 framework for 
energy and carbon reporting. The calculation methods have used the 2020 Defra (Department for Environment, Food & 
Rural Affairs)/BEIS (Department for Business, Energy & Industrial Strategy) conversion factors for company reporting.

Intensity measures
The chosen intensity measurement ratio is the total gross emissions in kg CO2e per £m revenue (kgCO2e/£m) to allow for 
emissions normalisation.

Independent auditor
The Group’s external auditor, PwC, has indicated their willingness to continue in office and in accordance with the 
recommendation of the Audit Committee, a resolution to reappoint PwC as the external auditor will be proposed at the 
upcoming AGM.

By order of the Group Board

Lucy Penfold
Group General Counsel & Company Secretary
22 March 2022

The Pebble Group plc
Broadway House
Trafford Wharf Road
Manchester
M17 1DD

Registered in England and Wales with company number: 12231361

83

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021Statement of Directors’ responsibilities
Statement of Directors’ responsibilities in respect of the financial statements

The Directors are also responsible for keeping adequate 
accounting records that are sufficient to show and explain 
the Group’s and Company’s transactions and disclose with 
reasonable accuracy at any time the financial position of the 
Group and Company and enable them to ensure that the 
financial statements comply with the Companies Act 2006.

The Directors are responsible for the maintenance and 
integrity of the Company’s website. Legislation in the United 
Kingdom governing the preparation and dissemination of 
financial statements may differ from legislation in other 
jurisdictions.

Directors’ confirmation
The Directors consider that the Annual Report and 
Accounts, taken as a whole, is fair, balanced and 
understandable and provides the information necessary for 
shareholders to assess the Group and Company’s position 
and performance, business model and strategy.

Claire Thomson
CFO
22 March 2022

The Directors are responsible for preparing the Annual 
Report and the financial statements in accordance with 
applicable law and regulation.

Company law requires the Directors to prepare financial 
statements for each financial year. Under that law the 
Directors have prepared the Group financial statements in 
accordance with UK-adopted international accounting 
standards and the company financial statements in 
accordance with United Kingdom Generally Accepted 
Accounting Practice (United Kingdom Accounting Standards, 
comprising FRS 102 “The Financial Reporting Standard 
applicable in the UK and Republic of Ireland”, and applicable 
law).

Under company law, Directors must not approve the 
financial statements unless they are satisfied that they give a 
true and fair view of the state of affairs of the Group and 
Company and of the profit or loss of the Group for that 
period. In preparing the financial statements, the Directors 
are required to:
• select suitable accounting policies and then apply them 

consistently;

• state whether applicable UK-adopted international 

accounting standards have been followed for the Group 
financial statements and United Kingdom Accounting 
Standards, comprising FRS 102 have been followed for the 
Company financial statements, subject to any material 
departures disclosed and explained in the financial 
statements;

• make judgements and accounting estimates that are 

reasonable and prudent; and

• prepare the financial statements on the going concern 

basis unless it is inappropriate to presume that the Group 
and Company will continue in business.

The Directors are responsible for safeguarding the assets of 
the Group and Company and hence for taking reasonable 
steps for the prevention and detection of fraud and other 
irregularities.

84

CORPORATE GOVERNANCEThe Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021Independent auditors’ report to the members of The Pebble Group plc
Report on the audit of the financial statements

Opinion
In our opinion:
• The Pebble Group plc’s Group financial statements and company financial statements (the “financial statements”) give a 
true and fair view of the state of the Group’s and of the company’s affairs as at 31 December 2021 and of the Group’s 
profit and the Group’s cash flows for the year then ended;

• the Group financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with UK-adopted international accounting 

standards;

• the company financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with United Kingdom Generally Accepted 

Accounting Practice (United Kingdom Accounting Standards, comprising FRS 102 “The Financial Reporting Standard 
applicable in the UK and Republic of Ireland”, and applicable law); and

• the financial statements have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006.
We have audited the financial statements, included within the Annual Report, which comprise: the consolidated statement 
of financial position and company balance sheet as at 31 December 2021; the consolidated income statement, consolidated 
statement of other comprehensive income, consolidated and company statement of changes in equity and consolidated 
cash flow statement for the year then ended; and the notes to the financial statements, which include a description of the 
significant accounting policies.

Basis for opinion
We conducted our audit in accordance with International Standards on Auditing (UK) (“ISAs (UK)”) and applicable law. Our 
responsibilities under ISAs (UK) are further described in the Auditors’ responsibilities for the audit of the financial 
statements section of our report. We believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is sufficient and appropriate to 
provide a basis for our opinion.

Independence
We remained independent of the Group in accordance with the ethical requirements that are relevant to our audit of the 
financial statements in the UK, which includes the FRC’s Ethical Standard, as applicable to other listed entities of public 
interest, and we have fulfilled our other ethical responsibilities in accordance with these requirements.

To the best of our knowledge and belief, we declare that non-audit services prohibited by the FRC’s Ethical Standard were 
not provided.

We have provided no non-audit services to the company in the period under audit.

Our audit approach
Overview
Audit scope
• The Group consists of two operating segments, Brand Addition and Facilisgroup, which are further split into nine reporting 

components of varying size, in the UK, US and other countries around the world. The Group financial statements are a 
consolidation of these components.

• We identified four components which required an audit of their complete financial information, being The Pebble 

Group plc, Brand Addition UK, Brand Addition US and Facilisgroup US.

• Four further components were also subject to audit procedures over specific balances due to their contribution to the 

Group; this included revenue and cash in Brand Addition China, intangible assets and associated amortisation expense in 
Facilisgroup Canada, accrued expenses and VAT liability in Brand Addition Hagen, and payroll expense and accrued 
expenses in Project Amber Bidco Limited.

• As a result of this scoping we obtained coverage over 94% of Group revenue, 84% of Group profit before tax and 86% of 

Group Adjusted EBITDA.

Key audit matters
• Accuracy of capitalised development costs (Group)

Materiality
• Overall Group materiality: £384,000 (2020: £291,000) based on 2.5% of Adjusted EBITDA.
• Overall company materiality: £345,600 (2020: £261,900) based on 1% of total assets, restricted to 90% of Group financial 

statement materiality.

• Performance materiality: £288,000 (2020: £218,000) (Group) and £259,200 (2020: £196,400) (company).

The scope of our audit
As part of designing our audit, we determined materiality and assessed the risks of material misstatement in the financial 
statements.

85

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021Independent auditors’ report to the members of The Pebble Group plc

Key audit matters
Key audit matters are those matters that, in the auditors’ professional judgement, were of most significance in the audit of 
the financial statements of the current period and include the most significant assessed risks of material misstatement 
(whether or not due to fraud) identified by the auditors, including those which had the greatest effect on: the overall audit 
strategy; the allocation of resources in the audit; and directing the efforts of the engagement team. These matters, and any 
comments we make on the results of our procedures thereon, were addressed in the context of our audit of the financial 
statements as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on these matters.

This is not a complete list of all risks identified by our audit.

Impact of Covid-19, which was a key audit matter last year, is no longer included because of the reduced impact of 
Covid-19 on the Group's operations and results. Otherwise, the key audit matters below are consistent with last year.

Key audit matter

How our audit addressed the key audit matter

Accuracy of capitalised development costs (Group)
Refer to Note 2k, Note 3b and Note 12 of the Notes to the 
Group financial statements

The Group capitalised costs of £4.3 million during the year 
ended 31 December 2021, of which £3.7m relates to 
internally generated costs. 

There is a risk that capitalised development costs additions 
are incorrectly valued in the closing balance sheet. This can 
arise where internally generated costs (such as wages and 
salaries) are incorrectly capitalised or inaccurately 
recorded.

We focused on this area due to the inherent level of 
judgement involved in assessing whether costs capitalised in 
the year meet the recognition criteria of IAS 38 'Intangible 
assets'.

We assessed and challenged whether the development 
costs capitalised met the criteria set within IAS 38 
'Intangible assets'. We did not identify any material issues 
in our work in this area.

We corroborated a sample of capitalised development 
costs to source documentation and traced through 
hours to the taskpoint system, including invoices and 
contracts of employment, and determined that they had 
been recorded accurately and met the criteria for 
capitalisation.

We agreed, on a sample basis, that the proportion of 
internal employee costs capitalised was appropriate 
based upon their roles and responsibilities and contracts 
of employment.

We assessed management’s determination of the date at 
which certain assets were deemed to be ready for use 
during the year, and therefore amortisation commenced, 
and agreed that appropriate judgements were made.

We assessed the useful economic lives of the intangible 
assets as applied by management in determining the 
amortisation charge and agreed that these lives are 
appropriate for the assets to which they relate, and have 
been accurately applied.

We evaluated the disclosures included within the 
financial statements relating to capitalised development 
costs and found them to be appropriate and complete.

How we tailored the audit scope
We tailored the scope of our audit to ensure that we performed enough work to be able to give an opinion on the financial 
statements as a whole, taking into account the structure of the Group and the company, the accounting processes and 
controls, and the industry in which they operate.

The Group is split into two main operating segments, being Brand Addition and Facilisgroup. These are further split into 
nine reporting components, which vary in size, and represent smaller operations in other countries around the world. The 
Group financial statements are a consolidation of these reporting components, as well as central operations.

We identified four full scope components based on their Adjusted EBITDA contribution: The Pebble Group plc, Brand 
Addition UK, Brand Addition US and Facilisgroup US.

To obtain sufficient coverage over each financial statement line item in the consolidated financial statements, we also 
scoped in specific line items in four other, smaller components.

We also audited material consolidation journals. All audit work was performed by the Group audit team.

As a result of this scoping we obtained coverage over 94% of Group revenue, 84% of Group profit before tax and 86% of 
Group Adjusted EBITDA.

86

FINANCIAL STATEMENTSThe Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021Materiality
The scope of our audit was influenced by our application of materiality. We set certain quantitative thresholds for 
materiality. These, together with qualitative considerations, helped us to determine the scope of our audit and the nature, 
timing and extent of our audit procedures on the individual financial statement line items and disclosures and in evaluating 
the effect of misstatements, both individually and in aggregate on the financial statements as a whole.

Based on our professional judgement, we determined materiality for the financial statements as a whole as follows:

Overall materiality

How we determined it

Rationale for benchmark applied

Financial statements - Group

Financial statements - company

£384,000 (2020: £291,000).

£345,600 (2020: £261,900).

2.5% of Adjusted EBITDA

Based on the benchmarks used in the 
Annual Report, Adjusted EBITDA is the 
primary measure used by the 
shareholders in assessing the 
performance of the Group, and is a 
generally accepted auditing benchmark. 
Due to the Group's continuing recovery 
from the impact of Covid-19, we have 
returned to using a single-year figure, 
whereas for the 2020 audit we used a 
3-year average of the Group's Adjusted 
EBITDA from the period 2018 - 2020.

1% of total assets, restricted to 90% of 
Group financial statement materiality

The Company is a non-trading holding 
Company. The entity's assets relate 
solely to their ownership of the 
subsidiary trading companies and thus 
reflect the Company's purpose. 
Company materiality has been restricted 
to ensure it is not greater than 90% of 
the Group's financial statement 
materiality.

For each component in the scope of our Group audit, we allocated a materiality that is less than our overall Group 
materiality. The range of materiality allocated across components was between £235,000 and £360,000. Certain 
components were audited to a local statutory audit materiality that was also less than our overall Group materiality.

We use performance materiality to reduce to an appropriately low level the probability that the aggregate of uncorrected 
and undetected misstatements exceeds overall materiality. Specifically, we use performance materiality in determining the 
scope of our audit and the nature and extent of our testing of account balances, classes of transactions and disclosures, for 
example in determining sample sizes. Our performance materiality was 75% (2020: 75%) of overall materiality, amounting to 
£288,000 (2020: £218,000) for the Group financial statements and £259,200 (2020: £196,400) for the company financial 
statements.

In determining the performance materiality, we considered a number of factors - the history of misstatements, risk 
assessment and aggregation risk and the effectiveness of controls - and concluded that an amount at the upper end of our 
normal range was appropriate.

We agreed with those charged with governance that we would report to them misstatements identified during our audit 
above £19,200 (Group audit) (2020: £14,550) and £17,280 (company audit) (2020: £13,095) as well as misstatements below 
those amounts that, in our view, warranted reporting for qualitative reasons.

Conclusions relating to going concern
Our evaluation of the directors’ assessment of the Group's and the company’s ability to continue to adopt the going 
concern basis of accounting included:
• obtaining management’s forecasts and information for the period to December 2023;
• evaluating and assessing the process by which the Group’s future cash flow forecasts were prepared;
• agreeing the opening position of the Group’s cash flow forecasts to the 2021 audited financial statements;
• reviewing the arithmetical accuracy of management’s forecasts;
• assessing and challenging management’s key assumptions in the going concern model, including the forecast sales, 

margins, capital expenditure and other costs assumptions over the period to December 2023;

• evaluating the appropriateness of the severe but plausible cash flow forecast used in management’s determination of the 

going concern basis of preparation, which included an assessment and sensitivity analysis and challenge of the key 
assumptions underpinning the cash flows throughout the going concern period;

• obtaining the terms of the Group’s financing facility and the covenants in place in relation to this facility, and determining 
that the Group’s base case and severe but plausible forecasts show compliance with all covenant conditions for at least 
12 months from the date of the approval of financial statements;

• gaining an understanding of the potential mitigating actions that the Directors could implement to meet the requirements 

of the covenants; and

87

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021Independent auditors’ report to the members of The Pebble Group plc 

• reviewing management’s disclosures in the financial statements. We are satisfied that they are consistent with the 

assessment performed. We also read the disclosures made in the other information and did not identify any 
inconsistencies with the financial statements.

Based on the work we have performed, we have not identified any material uncertainties relating to events or conditions 
that, individually or collectively, may cast significant doubt on the Group's and the company’s ability to continue as a going 
concern for a period of at least twelve months from when the financial statements are authorised for issue.

In auditing the financial statements, we have concluded that the directors’ use of the going concern basis of accounting in 
the preparation of the financial statements is appropriate.

However, because not all future events or conditions can be predicted, this conclusion is not a guarantee as to the Group's 
and the company's ability to continue as a going concern.

Our responsibilities and the responsibilities of the directors with respect to going concern are described in the relevant 
sections of this report.

Reporting on other information
The other information comprises all of the information in the Annual Report other than the financial statements and our 
auditors’ report thereon. The directors are responsible for the other information. Our opinion on the financial statements 
does not cover the other information and, accordingly, we do not express an audit opinion or, except to the extent 
otherwise explicitly stated in this report, any form of assurance thereon.

In connection with our audit of the financial statements, our responsibility is to read the other information and, in doing so, 
consider whether the other information is materially inconsistent with the financial statements or our knowledge obtained 
in the audit, or otherwise appears to be materially misstated. If we identify an apparent material inconsistency or material 
misstatement, we are required to perform procedures to conclude whether there is a material misstatement of the 
financial statements or a material misstatement of the other information. If, based on the work we have performed, we 
conclude that there is a material misstatement of this other information, we are required to report that fact. We have 
nothing to report based on these responsibilities.

With respect to the Strategic report and Directors' Report, we also considered whether the disclosures required by the 
UK Companies Act 2006 have been included.

Based on our work undertaken in the course of the audit, the Companies Act 2006 requires us also to report certain 
opinions and matters as described below.

Strategic report and Directors' Report
In our opinion, based on the work undertaken in the course of the audit, the information given in the Strategic report and 
Directors' Report for the year ended 31 December 2021 is consistent with the financial statements and has been prepared 
in accordance with applicable legal requirements.

In light of the knowledge and understanding of the Group and company and their environment obtained in the course of 
the audit, we did not identify any material misstatements in the Strategic report and Directors' Report.

Responsibilities for the financial statements and the audit
Responsibilities of the directors for the financial statements
As explained more fully in the Statement of Directors' responsibilities in respect of the financial statements, the directors 
are responsible for the preparation of the financial statements in accordance with the applicable framework and for being 
satisfied that they give a true and fair view. The directors are also responsible for such internal control as they determine is 
necessary to enable the preparation of financial statements that are free from material misstatement, whether due to 
fraud or error.
In preparing the financial statements, the directors are responsible for assessing the Group’s and the company’s ability to 
continue as a going concern, disclosing, as applicable, matters related to going concern and using the going concern basis 
of accounting unless the directors either intend to liquidate the Group or the company or to cease operations, or have no 
realistic alternative but to do so.

Auditors’ responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements
Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements as a whole are free from 
material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error, and to issue an auditors’ report that includes our opinion. 
Reasonable assurance is a high level of assurance, but is not a guarantee that an audit conducted in accordance with 
ISAs (UK) will always detect a material misstatement when it exists. Misstatements can arise from fraud or error and are 
considered material if, individually or in the aggregate, they could reasonably be expected to influence the economic 
decisions of users taken on the basis of these financial statements.

Irregularities, including fraud, are instances of non-compliance with laws and regulations. We design procedures in line with 
our responsibilities, outlined above, to detect material misstatements in respect of irregularities, including fraud. The 
extent to which our procedures are capable of detecting irregularities, including fraud, is detailed below.

88

FINANCIAL STATEMENTSThe Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021Based on our understanding of the Group and industry, we identified that the principal risks of non-compliance with laws 
and regulations related to employment legislation and health and safety laws, and we considered the extent to which 
non-compliance might have a material effect on the financial statements. We also considered those laws and regulations 
that have a direct impact on the financial statements such as the Companies Act 2006, AIM listing rules and tax legislation. 
We evaluated management’s incentives and opportunities for fraudulent manipulation of the financial statements (including 
the risk of override of controls), and determined that the principal risks were related to inappropriate journal entries to 
increase revenue or Adjusted EBITDA, and management bias in accounting estimates. Audit procedures performed by the 
engagement team included:
• obtaining an understanding of the legal and regulatory framework applicable to the Group and how the Group is 

complying with that framework;

• discussions with management and the Audit Committee, including consideration of known or suspected instances of 

non-compliance with laws and regulation and fraud;

• reviewing minutes of meetings of those charged with governance, where available;
• reading any key correspondence with regulatory authorities that has taken place in the year;
• incorporating an element of unpredictability into our audit procedures;
• identifying and testing journal entries, including those with unusual account combinations relating to the principal fraud 

risks set out above; and

• challenging assumptions and judgements made by management in their significant accounting estimates.
There are inherent limitations in the audit procedures described above. We are less likely to become aware of instances of 
non-compliance with laws and regulations that are not closely related to events and transactions reflected in the financial 
statements. Also, the risk of not detecting a material misstatement due to fraud is higher than the risk of not detecting 
one resulting from error, as fraud may involve deliberate concealment by, for example, forgery or intentional 
misrepresentations, or through collusion.

Our audit testing might include testing complete populations of certain transactions and balances, possibly using data 
auditing techniques. However, it typically involves selecting a limited number of items for testing, rather than testing 
complete populations. We will often seek to target particular items for testing based on their size or risk characteristics. 
In other cases, we will use audit sampling to enable us to draw a conclusion about the population from which the sample is 
selected.

A further description of our responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements is located on the FRC’s website at: 
www.frc.org.uk/auditorsresponsibilities. This description forms part of our auditors’ report.

Use of this report
This report, including the opinions, has been prepared for and only for the company’s members as a body in accordance 
with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the Companies Act 2006 and for no other purpose. We do not, in giving these opinions, accept 
or assume responsibility for any other purpose or to any other person to whom this report is shown or into whose hands it 
may come save where expressly agreed by our prior consent in writing.

Other required reporting
Companies Act 2006 exception reporting
Under the Companies Act 2006 we are required to report to you if, in our opinion:
• we have not obtained all the information and explanations we require for our audit; or
• adequate accounting records have not been kept by the company, or returns adequate for our audit have not been 

received from branches not visited by us; or

• certain disclosures of directors’ remuneration specified by law are not made; or
• the company financial statements are not in agreement with the accounting records and returns.
We have no exceptions to report arising from this responsibility.

Jonathan Studholme (Senior Statutory Auditor)
for and on behalf of PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP

Chartered Accountants and Statutory Auditors

Manchester

22 March 2022

89

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021Consolidated income statement
For the year ended 31 December 2021 

Revenue

Cost of goods sold

Gross profit
Operating expenses

Operating expenses – exceptional

Total operating expenses

Operating profit

Analysed as:

Adjusted EBITDA1

Depreciation

Amortisation

Share-based payment charge

Exceptional items

Total operating profit

Finance expense 

Profit before taxation

Income tax expense

Profit for the year

Basic earnings per share

Diluted earnings per share

Year ended
31 December
2021
£’000

Year ended 
31 December
 2020
£’000

115,101

(73,128)

41,973

(32,107)

82,374

(51,382)

30,992

(24,781)

-

(542)

(32,107)

(25,323)

9,866

5,669

15,378

(1,986)

(2,811)

(715)

-

9,866

(549)

9,317

(1,970)

7,347

4.39p

4.38p

9,755

(1,567)

(1,963)

(14)

(542)

5,669

(700)

4,969

(889)

4,080

2.44p

2.44p

Note

4

5

5

7

13

12

24

7

8

10

11

11

Note 1: Adjusted EBITDA, which is defined as operating profit before depreciation, amortisation, exceptional items, and share-based payment charge is a non-GAAP metric used by 
management and is not an IFRS disclosure.

All results derive from continuing operations. 

90

FINANCIAL STATEMENTSThe Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021Consolidated statement of other comprehensive income
For the year ended 31 December 2021

Items that may be subsequently reclassified to profit and loss

Foreign operations – foreign currency translation differences

Other comprehensive income/(expense) for the year

Profit for the year

Total comprehensive income for the year

Year ended
31 December
2021
£’000

Year ended 
31 December
 2020
£’000

277

277

7,347

7,624

(708)

(708)

4,080

3,372

91

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021Consolidated statement of financial position
As at 31 December 2021

ASSETS

Non-current assets
Intangible assets

Property, plant and equipment

Deferred tax asset

Total non-current assets

Current assets
Inventories

Trade and other receivables

Cash and cash equivalents

Current tax asset

Total current assets

TOTAL ASSETS

LIABILITIES

Non-current liabilities
Lease liability

Trade and other payables

Deferred tax liability

Total non-current liabilities

Current liabilities
Lease liability

Trade and other payables

Current tax liability

Total current liabilities

TOTAL LIABILITIES

NET ASSETS

Equity and reserves
Share capital

Share premium

Capital reserve

Merger reserve

Translation reserve

Share-based payments reserve

Retained earnings

TOTAL EQUITY

As at 
31 December
2021
£’000

As at 
31 December
 2020
£’000

Note

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

18

14

19

21

21

55,674

7,927

300

63,901

10,093

29,422

12,051

-

51,566

54,017

9,102

493

63,612

12,109

20,988

7,066

829

40,992

115,467

104,604

6,388

-

3,035

9,423

1,384

30,065

20

31,469

40,892

74,575

1,675

78,451

125

7,645

930

2,637

11,212

1,334

25,775

-

27,109

38,321

66,283

1,800

78,451

-

(103,581)

(103,581)

(1,327)

681

98,551

74,575

(1,604)

13

91,204

66,283

The notes on pages 95 to 124 are an integral part of these financial statements.

The financial statements on pages 90 to 124 were approved by the Board of Directors and authorised for issue on 22 March 
2022, and were signed on its behalf by:

C Thomson
Director
22 March 2022

92

FINANCIAL STATEMENTSThe Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021Consolidated statement of changes in equity
For the year ended 31 December 2021

Share 
capital
£’000

Share 
premium
£’000

Capital 
reserve
£’000

Merger 
reserve
£’000

Translation 
reserve
£’000

Share-based 
payments
 reserve
£’000

At 1 January 2020

1,800

78,451

Profit for the year

Other comprehensive 
expense for the year

Total comprehensive 
income/(expense)

Employee share schemes 
– value of employee 
services (note 24)

Total transactions with 
owners recognised in 
equity 

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

At 31 December 2020

1,800

78,451

Profit for the year

Other comprehensive 
income for the year

Total comprehensive 
income

Purchase of deferred 
shares

Employee share schemes 
– value of employee 
services (note 24)

Deferred tax on employee 
share schemes

Total transactions with 
owners recognised in 
equity

-

-

-

(125)

-

-

(125)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

At 31 December 2021

1,675

78,451

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

125

-

-

125

125

(103,581)

(896)

-

-

-

-

-

-

(708)

(708)

-

-

(103,581)

(1,604)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

277

277

-

-

-

-

(103,581)

(1,327)

-

-

-

-

13

13

13

-

-

-

-

601

67

668

681

The notes on pages 95 to 124 are an integral part of these financial statements.

Retained 
earnings 
£’000

Total 
equity
£’000

87,124

62,898

4,080

4,080

-

(708)

4,080

3,372

-

-

13

13

91,204

66,283

7,347

7,347

-

277

7,347

7,624

-

-

-

-

-

601

67

668

98,551

74,575

93

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021Consolidated cash flow statement
For the year ended 31 December 2021

Operating profit
Adjustments for:

– Depreciation

– Amortisation

– Share-based payments charge

–  Profit on disposal of fixed assets

Cash flows from operating activities before changes in working capital
– Change in inventories

– Change in trade receivables

–  Change in trade payables

Cash flows from operating activities
–  Income taxes paid 

Net cash flows from operating activities

Cash flows from investing activities
– Purchase of property, plant and equipment

– Purchase of intangible assets

Net cash flows used in investing activities

Cash flows from financing activities
– Lease payments

–  Interest paid

Net cash flows used in financing activities

NET CASH FLOWS

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year

Effect of exchange rate fluctuations on cash held

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

The notes on pages 95 to 124 are an integral part of these financial statements.

Year ended
31 December
2021
£’000

Year ended 
31 December
 2020
£’000

Note

9,866

5,669

13

12

24

15

16

19

13

12

8

17

17

1,986

2,811

715

(13)

15,365

2,016

(8,433)

3,556

12,504

(521)

11,983

(680)

(4,602)

(5,282)

(1,360)

(549)

(1,909)

4,792

7,066

193

12,051

1,567

1,963

13

-

9,212

(4,157)

4,556

(2,146)

7,465

(1,313)

6,152

(806)

(4,871)

(5,677)

(1,141)

(700)

(1,841)

(1,366)

8,861

(429)

7,066

94

FINANCIAL STATEMENTSThe Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021Notes to the Group financial statements

1. General information 
The principal activity of The Pebble Group plc (the 
“Company”) is that of a holding company and the principal 
activity of the Company and its subsidiaries (the “Group”) is 
the sale of products, services and technology to the 
promotional merchandise industry. The Group has two 
segments, Brand Addition and Facilisgroup. For Brand 
Addition this is the sale of promotional products 
internationally, to many of the world’s best-known brands, 
and for Facilisgroup the provision of technology, 
consolidated buying power and community learning and 
networking events to SME promotional product distributors 
in North America, its Partners, through subscription-based 
services.

The Company was incorporated on 27 September 2019 in 
the United Kingdom and is a public company limited by 
shares registered in England and Wales. The registered 
office of the Company is Broadway House, Trafford Wharf 
Road, Trafford Park, Manchester, England M17 1DD. The 
Company registration number is 12231361.

2. Accounting policies 
(a) Basis of preparation
The Group financial statements have been prepared in 
accordance with UK-adopted International Accounting 
Standards and with the requirements of the Companies 
Act 2006 as applicable to companies reporting under those 
standards. The Company financial statements have been 
prepared under FRS 102. Both financial statements have 
been prepared on the historical cost basis with the 
exception of certain items which are measured at fair value 
as disclosed in the principal accounting policies set out 
below. These policies have been consistently applied to all 
years presented unless otherwise stated. 

The financial information is presented in Sterling and has 
been rounded to the nearest thousand (£’000).

(b) Going concern
The Group meets its day-to-day working capital 
requirements through its own cash balances and committed 
banking facilities. In assessing the appropriateness of 
adopting the going concern basis in the preparation of 
these financial statements, the Directors have prepared 
cash flow forecasts and projections for the two years 
ending 31 December 2023. 

The forecasts and projections, which the Directors consider 
to be prudent, have been further sensitised by applying 
reductions to revenue growth and margin, to consider a 
severe but plausible downside. Under both the base and 
sensitised case the Group is expected to have headroom 
against covenants, which are based on interest cover and 
net leverage, and a sufficient level of financial resources 
available through existing facilities when the future funding 
requirements of the Group are compared with the level of 
committed available facilities. Based on this, the Directors 
are satisfied that the Group has adequate resources to 
continue in operational existence for the foreseeable 
future. For this reason, they continue to adopt the going 
concern basis in preparing the Group and Company financial 
statements.

(c) Forward-looking statements
Certain statements in this Annual Report are forward 
looking with respect to the operations, strategy, 
performance, financial condition and growth opportunities 
of the Group. The terms “expect”, “anticipate”, “should 
be”, “will be”, “is likely to” and similar expressions identify 
forward-looking statements. Although the Board believes 
that the expectations reflected in these forward-looking 
statements are reasonable, by their nature these 
statements are based on assumptions and are subject to a 
number of risks and uncertainties. Actual events could differ 
materially from those expressed or implied by these 
forward-looking statements. Factors which may cause 
future outcomes to differ from those foreseen in forward-
looking statements include, without limitation: general 
economic conditions and business conditions in the Group’s 
markets; customers’ expectations and behaviours; supply 
chain developments; technology changes; the actions of 
competitors; exchange rate fluctuations; and legislative, 
fiscal and regulatory developments. Information contained 
in these financial statements relating to the Group should 
not be relied upon as a guide to future performance.

(d) New standards, amendments and 
interpretations
New and amended standards adopted by the Group 
The Group has applied the following standards and 
amendments for the first time for their annual reporting 
period commencing 1 January 2021: 
• Amendments to IFRS 7, IFRS 4 and IFRS 16 Interest rate 

benchmark reform – Phase 2

The amendment listed above did not have any impact on 
the amounts recognised in prior periods and is not 
expected to significantly affect the current or future 
periods. 

New standards and interpretations not yet adopted 
Certain new accounting standards and interpretations have 
been published that are not mandatory for 31 December 
2021 reporting periods and have not been early adopted by 
the Group. These standards are not expected to have a 
material impact on the Group in the current or future 
reporting periods and on foreseeable future transactions. 

Judgements made by the Directors in the application of 
these accounting policies that have a significant effect on 
these financial statements together with estimates with a 
significant risk of material adjustment in the next year are 
discussed in note 3.

(e) Basis of consolidation
Subsidiaries are all entities over which the Group has 
control. The Group controls an entity when the Group is 
exposed to, or has rights to, variable returns from its 
involvement with the entity and has the ability to affect 
those returns through its power over the entity. Subsidiaries 
are fully consolidated from the date on which control is 
transferred to the Group and are deconsolidated from the 
date control ceases.

Inter-company transactions, balances and unrealised gains 
and losses on transactions between Group companies are 
eliminated. Accounting policies of subsidiaries have been 
changed where necessary to ensure consistency with the 
policies adopted by the Group.

95

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021Notes to the Group financial statements
(continued)

2. Accounting policies (continued)
(f) Revenue
Revenue arises from the provision of services through 
technology and a global infrastructure that enables the 
efficient sale and distribution of products to support 
corporate marketing activity and consumer promotions of 
businesses in Europe, North America and Asia. 

To determine whether to recognise revenue, the Group 
follows the 5-step process as set out within IFRS 15:

1.  Identifying the contract with a customer

2.  Identifying the performance obligations

3.  Determining the transaction price

4.   Allocating the transaction price to the performance 

obligations

5.   Recognising revenue when/as performance obligation(s) 

are satisfied

Revenue is measured at transaction price, stated net of VAT, 
rebates and other sales related taxes.

Revenue is recognised either at a point in time, or over-
time as the Group satisfies performance obligations by 
transferring the promised goods and services to its 
customers as described below. Variable consideration, in 
the form of rebates, is recognised at a point in time.

Brand Addition sale of promotional product
Contracts with customers take the form of customer orders 
under a framework agreement. There is one distinct 
performance obligation, being the design, sourcing and 
distribution of products to the customer, for which the 
transaction price is clearly identified. Revenue is recognised 
at a point in time when the Group satisfies performance 
obligations by transferring the promised goods to its 
customers, i.e. when control has passed from the Group to 
the customer. This tends to be on receipt of the product by 
the customer.

Customer invoices tend to be raised when the goods are 
delivered and the performance obligation is satisfied. These 
invoices are shown within trade receivables and payment is 
usually made within 60 days (being the common payment 
terms). In cases where the goods have been delivered and 
an invoice cannot be raised at that time, the income is 
accrued and presented within contract assets on the 
statement of financial position. A small number of 
customers are invoiced in advance and these amounts are 
deferred and presented within contract liabilities. 

Facilisgroup provision of technology, consolidated 
buying power and community learning through 
subscription-based services
Services are provided through signed annual partner 
agreements. There is one distinct performance obligation, 
being the provision of access to the Facilisgroup network. 
The transaction price is set on 1 January each year by 
reference to the previous year sales volumes and is fixed for 
the financial year. For new partners, the transaction price is 
calculated by reference to forecasted sales for the year the 
partner joins. Revenue is recognised over time on a monthly 

96

basis as the partners receive the benefits of being part of 
the network. Payments are received on a monthly basis as 
the performance obligations are satisfied over time.

(g) EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA
Earnings before Interest, Taxation, Depreciation and 
Amortisation (“EBITDA”) and Adjusted EBITDA are non-GAAP 
measures used by management to assess the operating 
performance of the Group. EBITDA is defined as operating 
profit before depreciation and amortisation. Exceptional 
items and share-based payment charge are excluded from 
EBITDA to calculate Adjusted EBITDA.

The Directors primarily use the Adjusted EBITDA measure 
when making decisions about the Group’s activities. As 
these are non-GAAP measures, EBITDA and Adjusted 
EBITDA measures used by other entities may not be 
calculated in the same way and hence are not directly 
comparable.

(h) Exceptional items
The Group’s income statement separately identifies 
exceptional items. Such items are those that in the 
Directors’ judgement are one-off in nature or non-
operating and need to be disclosed separately by virtue of 
their size or incidence and may include, but are not limited 
to, restructuring costs, professional fees and other costs 
directly related to the purchase of businesses, and the 
raising of capital. In determining whether an item should be 
disclosed as an exceptional item, the Directors consider 
quantitative and qualitative factors such as the frequency, 
predictability of occurrence and significance. This is 
consistent with the way financial performance is measured 
by management and reported to the Board.

(i) Taxation
Current tax is provided at amounts expected to be paid (or 
recovered) using the tax rates and laws that have been 
enacted or substantively enacted by the balance sheet 
date.

Deferred tax is recognised in respect of all timing 
differences that have originated but not reversed at the 
balance sheet date where events or transactions that result 
in an obligation to pay more tax in the future, or a right to 
pay less tax in future, have occurred at the balance sheet 
date. Timing differences are differences between the 
Group’s taxable profits and its results as stated in the 
financial statements that arise from the inclusion of gains 
and losses in tax assessments in periods different from 
those in which they are recognised in the financial 
statements. Deferred income tax assets and liabilities are 
offset when there is a legally enforceable right to offset 
current tax assets against current tax liabilities and when the 
deferred income taxes relate to the same fiscal authority.

A net deferred tax asset is regarded as recoverable and 
therefore recognised only to the extent that, on the basis of 
all available evidence, it can be regarded as more likely than 
not that there will be suitable taxable profits from which the 
future reversal of the underlying timing differences can be 
deducted.

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021FINANCIAL STATEMENTS2. Accounting policies (continued)
Deferred tax is measured at the average tax rates that are 
expected to apply in the periods in which the timing 
differences are expected to reverse based on tax rates and 
laws that have been enacted or substantively enacted by 
the balance sheet date. Deferred tax is measured on a 
non-discounted basis.

Current and deferred tax is recognised in profit or loss, 
except to the extent that it relates to items recognised in 
other comprehensive income or directly in equity. In this 
case, the tax is also recognised in other comprehensive 
income or directly in equity, respectively.

(j) Finance costs
Finance costs of financial liabilities are recognised in the 
income statement over the term of such instruments at a 
constant rate on the carrying amount. Issue costs relating to 
financial instruments are recognised in the income 
statement over the term of the debt at a constant rate over 
the instrument’s life. Foreign exchange differences on 
revaluation of foreign currency borrowings are also 
presented within finance costs.

(k) Intangible assets
All business combinations are accounted for by applying the 
purchase method. Goodwill represents the difference 
between the cost of the acquisition and the fair value of the 
net identifiable assets acquired. Identifiable intangibles are 
those which can be sold separately, or which arise from 
legal or contractual rights regardless of whether those 
rights are separable and are initially recognised at fair value. 
In cases where the vendors of an acquired business are 
required to remain employed by the Group post-
acquisition, the deferred payments are treated as post-
acquisition remuneration and charged to profit and loss.

Goodwill is stated at cost less any accumulated impairment 
losses. Goodwill is allocated to cash-generating units and is 
not amortised but is tested annually for impairment. Other 
intangibles are stated at cost less accumulated amortisation 
and accumulated impairment losses.

All intangible assets are denominated in the functional 
currency of the relevant subsidiary company and 
retranslated into Sterling at each period end date. Exchange 
differences are dealt with through the Consolidated 
statement of other comprehensive income. Intangible 
assets are presented in note 12.

Customer relationships
Customer relationships acquired in a business combination 
are recognised at fair value at the date of acquisition. 
Customer relationships have a finite life and are 
subsequently carried at cost less accumulated amortisation. 
Amortisation is calculated using the straight-line method to 
allocate the cost of these assets over their estimated useful 
lives of 20 years.

Development costs
Research costs are charged to the income statement in the 
year in which they are incurred and are presented within 
operating expenses. Internal development costs that are 
incurred during the development of significant and 
separately identifiable new technology are capitalised when 
the following criteria are met:
• it is technically feasible to complete the technological 

development so that it will be available for use;

• management intends to complete the technological 

development and use or sell it;

• it can be demonstrated how the technological 

development will develop probable future economic 
benefits;

• adequate technical, financial and other resources to 

complete the development and to use or sell the product 
are available; and

• expenditure attributable to the technological product 

during its development can be reliably measured.

Capitalised development costs include costs of materials 
and direct labour costs. Internal costs that are capitalised 
are limited to incremental costs specific to the project. 

Other development expenditures that do not meet these 
criteria are recognised as an expense as incurred and 
presented within operating expenses, together with any 
amortisation which is charged to the income statement on 
a straight-line basis over the estimated useful lives of 
development intangible assets.

Assets classified as “work in progress” are not amortised as 
such assets are not currently available for (or in) use. Once 
available for use, assets will be recategorised and amortised 
at the rate appropriate to their classification.

Computer software
Computer software purchased separately, that does not 
form an integral part of related hardware, is capitalised at 
cost.

Amortisation is charged to profit or loss on a straight-line 
basis over the estimated useful lives of intangible assets 
unless such lives are indefinite and is presented within 
operating expenses. All intangible assets are amortised from 
the date they are available for use. The estimated useful 
lives are as follows:
• Customer relationships – 20 years;
• Computer software – 3-5 years;
• Development costs – 3 years.

(l) Impairment losses
The carrying amounts of the Group’s assets are tested for 
impairment. Assets with an indefinite useful life are not 
depreciated or amortised but are tested for impairment at 
each reporting date. Assets subject to amortisation/
depreciation and impairment losses are tested for 
impairment every time events or circumstances indicate 
that they may be impaired.

97

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021Notes to the Group financial statements
(continued)

2. Accounting policies (continued)
Impairment losses are recognised in the income statement 
based on the difference between the carrying amount and 
the recoverable amount. 

An impairment loss is recognised for the amount by which 
the asset’s carrying amount exceeds its recoverable 
amount, which is the higher of fair value less costs of 
disposal and value in use. To determine the value in use, 
management estimates expected future cash flows and 
determines a suitable discount rate in order to calculate the 
present value of those cash flows. The data used for 
impairment testing procedures are directly linked to the 
Group’s latest approved budget, adjusted as necessary to 
exclude the effects of future reorganisations and asset 
enhancements. Discount factors are determined individually 
for each asset and reflect current market assessments of 
the time value of money and asset-specific risk.

The Group makes use of a simplified approach in accounting 
for trade and other receivables as well as contract assets 
and records the loss allowance as lifetime expected credit 
losses. These are the expected shortfalls in contractual 
cash flows, considering the potential for default at any point 
during the life of the financial instrument. In calculating, the 
Group uses its historical experience, external indicators and 
forward-looking information to calculate the expected 
credit losses.

The Group assesses impairment of trade receivables on a 
collective basis as they possess shared credit risk 
characteristics; they have been grouped based on the days 
past due.

(m) Financial instruments
The Group’s policy is to recognise transfers into and out of 
fair value hierarchy levels as at the end of the reporting 
period.

Level 1: The fair value of financial instruments traded in 
active markets (such as publicly traded derivatives, and 
equity securities) is based on quoted market prices at the 
end of the reporting period. The quoted market price used 
for financial assets held by the Group is the current bid 
price. These instruments are included in level 1.

Level 2: The fair value of financial instruments that are not 
traded in an active market (for example, over-the-counter 
derivatives) is determined using valuation techniques which 
maximise the use of observable market data and rely as 
little as possible on entity-specific estimates. If all significant 
inputs required to fair value an instrument are observable, 
the instrument is included in level 2.

Level 3: If one or more of the significant inputs is not based 
on observable market data, the instrument is included in 
level 3. This is the case for unlisted equity securities.

Financial assets
Non-derivative financial assets are classified as either 
financial assets at amortised cost, fair value through profit 
or loss or fair value through other comprehensive income. 
The Group derecognises a financial asset when the 
contractual rights to the cash flows from the asset expire, 
or it transfers the rights to receive the contractual cash 
flows in a transaction in which substantially all of the risks 

98

and rewards of ownership of the financial asset are 
transferred. The basis of classification depends on the 
Group’s business model and the contractual cash flow 
characteristics of the financial asset. The majority of 
financial assets of the Group are held at amortised cost. 

Financial assets include trade and other receivables and 
cash and cash equivalents. Trade and other receivables are 
amounts due from customers for services performed in the 
ordinary course of business. If collection is expected in one 
year or less, they are classified as current assets. If not, they 
are presented as non-current assets. Cash and cash 
equivalents comprise cash balances held in banks.

Trade receivables are recognised initially at fair value and 
subsequently measured at amortised cost using the 
effective interest method, less provision for impairment. 
Under IFRS 9, the Group elected to use the simplified 
approach to measure the loss allowance at an amount equal 
to lifetime expected credit losses for trade receivables. A 
provision for impairment of trade receivables is established 
when there is objective evidence that the Group will not be 
able to collect all amounts due according to the original 
terms of the receivables. Significant financial difficulties of 
the counterparty, probability that the counterparty will 
enter bankruptcy or financial reorganisation, and default or 
delinquency in payments are considered indicators that the 
trade receivable is impaired. In addition, IFRS 9 requires the 
Group to consider forward-looking information and the 
probability of default when calculating expected credit 
losses. The measurement of expected credit losses reflects 
an unbiased and probability weighted amount that is 
determined by evaluating the range of possible outcomes as 
well as incorporating the time value of money. The expected 
loss rates are based on the payment profiles of sales over 
the year and the corresponding historical credit losses 
experienced within this period. The historical loss rates are 
adjusted to reflect current and forward-looking information 
on factors affecting the ability of the customers to settle 
the receivables.

The Group considers reasonable and supportable 
customer-specific and market information about past 
events, current conditions and forecasts of future economic 
conditions when measuring expected credit losses. The 
amount of the provision is the difference between the 
carrying amount and the present value of estimated future 
cash flows of the asset, discounted, where material, at the 
original effective interest rate. The carrying amount of the 
asset is reduced through the use of an allowance account, 
and the amount of the loss is recognised in the income 
statement within operating expenses. 

When a trade receivable is uncollectable, it is written off 
against the allowance account for trade receivables. 
Subsequent recoveries of amounts previously written off 
are credited against operating expenses in the income 
statement. Only when amounts are confirmed irrecoverable, 
are they written off to the income statement.

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021FINANCIAL STATEMENTS2. Accounting policies (continued)
Financial liabilities
Non-derivative financial liabilities are initially recognised at 
fair value less any directly attributable transaction costs. 
Subsequent to initial recognition, these liabilities are 
measured at amortised cost using the effective interest 
method. The Group’s borrowings, finance leases, trade and 
most other payables fall into this category of financial 
instruments.

The Group derecognises a financial liability when its 
contractual obligations are discharged, cancelled or expire.

Financial derivatives
The Group uses derivative financial instruments to hedge its 
exposure to risks arising from operational activities, 
principally foreign exchange risk. In accordance with 
treasury policy, the Group does not hold or issue derivative 
financial instruments for trading purposes. The Group does 
not hedge account for these items. Any gain or loss arising 
from derivative financial instruments is based on changes in 
fair value, which is determined by direct reference to active 
market transactions or using a valuation technique where no 
active market exists. At certain times the Group has foreign 
currency forward contracts that fall into this category.

(n) Foreign currencies
Items included in the financial statements are measured 
using the currency of the primary economic environment in 
which the Group operates (“the functional currency”). 
The functional and presentational currency is Pounds 
Sterling. 

The functional currency of a subsidiary is determined based 
on specific primary and secondary factors including the 
principal currency of the cash flows and the primary 
economic environment in which the subsidiary operates. 
Once determined, the functional currency is used and 
translated for consolidation purposes.

Foreign currency items are translated using the transaction 
date exchange rate. Monetary assets and liabilities 
denominated in foreign currencies are translated at the 
closing rate. Foreign currency differences are taken to the 
income statement. Non-monetary assets and liabilities that 
are measured based on historical cost in a foreign currency 
are translated at the transaction date exchange rate. 

The assets and liabilities of foreign operations, including 
goodwill and fair value adjustments arising on consolidation, 
are translated at closing rates. The income and expenses of 
foreign operations are translated at the average exchange 
rate of the year which approximates to the transaction date 
exchange rates. Exchange differences arising on 
consolidation are presented within other comprehensive 
income. 

(o) Tangible assets and depreciation
Tangible fixed assets are stated at historical purchase cost 
less accumulated depreciation. Cost includes the original 
purchase price of the asset and the costs attributable to 
bringing the asset to its working condition for its intended 
use.

Depreciation is calculated so as to write off the cost of an 
asset, less its estimated residual value, over the useful 
economic life of that asset as follows:
• Fixtures and fittings – 3 - 15 years;
• Computer hardware – 5 years.

(p) Cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents comprise cash balances. Bank 
borrowings that are repayable on demand and form an 
integral part of the Group’s cash management are included 
as a component of cash and cash equivalents for the 
purpose only of the statement of cash flows.

(q) Inventories
Inventories are valued at the lower of cost and net realisable 
value on a FIFO basis. Cost comprises purchase price plus 
associated freight and duty costs for imported goods. 
Inventories are regularly assessed for evidence of 
impairment. Where such evidence is identified, a provision 
is recognised to reduce the value of stock to its selling price 
after incurring any future costs to sell.

(r) Leases
The Group applies IFRS 16 to account for leases. 
At inception of a contract, the Group assesses whether a 
contract is, or contains, a lease. A contract is, or contains, 
a lease if the contract conveys the right to control the use 
of an identified asset for a period of time in exchange for 
consideration.

The Group recognises a right-of-use asset and a lease 
liability at the lease commencement date. The right-of-use 
asset is initially measured at cost, which comprises the 
initial amount of the lease liability adjusted for any lease 
payments made at or before the commencement date, plus 
any initial direct costs incurred and an estimate of costs to 
restore the underlying asset, less any lease incentives 
received. Extension and termination options are included in 
a number of property and equipment leases across the 
Group and so lease payments to be made under reasonably 
certain extension options are also included in the 
measurement of the liability.

The right-of-use asset is subsequently depreciated using 
the straight-line method from the commencement date to 
the earlier of the end of the useful life of the right-of-use 
asset or the end of the lease term. In addition, the 
right-of-use asset is periodically reduced by impairment 
losses, if any, and adjusted for certain remeasurements of 
the lease liabilities.

The lease liability is initially measured at the present value of 
lease payments that were not paid at the commencement 
date, discounted using the Group’s incremental borrowing 
rate, which is based on the Group’s financing facilities, and 
adjusted where necessary for the specific terms of the 
lease. 

The lease liability is measured at amortised cost using the 
effective interest method. If there is a remeasurement of 
the lease liability, a corresponding adjustment is made to 
the carrying amount of the right-of-use asset, or is 
recorded directly in profit or loss if the carrying amount of 
the right-of-use asset is zero.

99

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021Notes to the Group financial statements
(continued)

2. Accounting policies (continued)
The Group presents right-of-use assets within property, 
plant and equipment in note 13.

Short-term leases and low value assets
The Group has elected not to recognise right-of-use assets 
and lease liabilities for short-term lease of machinery that 
have a lease term of 12 months or less or leases of low value 
assets. These lease payments are expensed on a straight-
line basis over the lease term.

(s) Segmental reporting
The Group reports its business activities in two areas being: 
• Brand Addition - sale of promotional product through 
services provided under framework contracts on an 
international basis; and

• Facilisgroup - provision of technology, consolidated buying 
power and community learning and networking events to 
SME promotional product distributors in North America 
through subscription-based services.

This is reported in a manner consistent with the internal 
reporting to the Executive Directors, which has been 
identified as the Chief Operating Decision Maker. 

(t) Employee benefits
The Group provides a range of benefits to employees, 
including annual bonus arrangements, paid holiday 
arrangements and defined contribution pension plans.

(i) Short-term benefits
Short-term benefits, including holiday pay and other similar 
non-monetary benefits, are recognised as an expense in the 
period in which the service is received.

(ii) Defined contribution pension plans
The Group operates a number of country-specific defined 
contribution plans for its employees. A defined contribution 
plan is a pension plan under which the Group pays fixed 
contributions into a separate entity. Once the contributions 
have been paid, the Group has no further payment 
obligations. The contributions are recognised as an expense 
when they are due. Amounts not paid are included in 
accruals within trade and other payables in the statement 
of financial position. The assets of the plans are held 
separately from the Group in independently administered 
funds.

(iii) Share-based payments
Equity-settled awards are valued at the grant date, and the 
fair value is charged as an expense in the income statement 
spread over the vesting period. Fair value of the awards are 
measured using an adjusted form of the Black-Scholes 
model which includes a Monte Carlo simulation model. The 
fair value of the options, appraised at the grant date, 
includes the impact of market-based vesting conditions if 
applicable. 

Share-based remuneration is recognised as an expense in 
profit or loss with the credit side of the entry being 
recorded in equity. 

Non-market vesting conditions are included in assumptions 
about the number of options that are expected to become 
exercisable. Estimates are subsequently revised if there is 

100

any indication that the number of share options expected 
to vest differs from previous estimates. Any adjustment to 
cumulative share-based compensation resulting from a 
revision is recognised in the current period. The number of 
vested options ultimately exercised by holders does not 
impact the expense recorded in any period.

(u) Government grants
In preparing the financial statements, IAS 20, ’Accounting for 
Government Grants and Disclosure of Government 
Assistance’ has been applied such that grants have been 
recognised in profit or loss on a systematic basis over the 
periods in which we have recognised the expense for the 
related costs for which the grants are intended to 
compensate. In Germany, a benefit of £0.5m has been 
received and credited to the income statement in 2021. 
This relates to Bridging Assistance for companies that have 
suffered a decline in revenue as a result of the pandemic. 
There are no unfulfilled conditions or other contingencies 
attached to this grant. 

In 2020, as part of the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme, 
a benefit of £1.0 million was credited to the income 
statement. A further benefit of $0.9 million had been 
received in the US and credited to the income statement 
against costs incurred, along with a further £0.3m taken in 
other countries.

(v) Equity, reserves and dividend payments
Share capital
Share capital represents the nominal (par) value of shares 
that have been issued.

Share premium
Share premium represents the difference between the 
nominal value of shares issued and the fair value of 
consideration received. Any transaction costs associated 
with the issuing of shares are deducted from share 
premium, net of any related income tax benefits.

Capital reserve
The capital reserve was created in 2021 as a result of the 
purchase by the Company of all deferred shares in issue.

Merger reserve
The merger reserve was created as a result of the share for 
share exchange under which The Pebble Group plc became 
the parent undertaking prior to the Initial Public Offering 
(“IPO”). Under merger accounting principles, the assets and 
liabilities of the subsidiaries were consolidated at book 
value in the Group financial statements and the 
consolidated reserves of the Group were adjusted to 
reflect the statutory share capital, share premium and 
other reserves of the Company as if it had always existed, 
with the difference presented as the merger reserve.

Translation reserve
The translation reserve includes foreign currency translation 
differences arising from the translation of financial 
statements of the Group’s foreign entities.

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021FINANCIAL STATEMENTS2. Accounting policies (continued)
Retained earnings
Retained earnings includes all current and prior period 
retained profits and losses.

All transactions with owners of the parent are recorded 
separately within equity.

Dividends are recognised when approved by the Group’s 
shareholders or, in the case of interim dividends, when the 
dividend has been paid. No interim dividend has been paid 
in the year (2020: £nil). The Directors do not recommend 
the payment of a final dividend (2020: £nil).

3. Judgements in applying accounting policies 
and key sources of estimation uncertainty
In the preparation of the Group financial statements, the 
Directors, in applying the accounting policies of the Group, 
make some judgements and estimates that affect the 
reported amounts in the financial statements. The following 
are the areas requiring the use of judgement and estimates 
that may significantly impact the financial statements:

(a) Accounting estimates
Information about estimates and assumptions that may have 
the most significant effect on recognition and measurement 
of assets, liabilities, income and expenses is provided below. 
Actual results may be substantially different.

Goodwill impairment
The Group tests goodwill for impairment every year in 
accordance with the relevant accounting policies. The 
recoverable amounts of cash-generating units are 
determined by calculating value in use. These calculations 
require the use of estimates.

Goodwill relates to the various acquisitions made and 
amounts to £35,805,000 as at 31 December 2021. The 
estimates used in the impairment calculation are set out in 
note 12. There is no significant risk of material adjustment to 
the carrying amount of the goodwill within the next 
twelve months.

Valuation of acquired intangibles
IFRS 3 requires separately identifiable intangible assets to 
be recognised on acquisitions. The principal estimates used 
in valuing the acquired intangible assets are the future cash 
flows estimated to be generated from these contracts, 
expected customer attrition, growth in revenues and the 
selection of appropriate discount rates to apply to the cash 
flows. The Directors’ assessment of these estimates is 
based on up-to-date information and evidence available at 
the time of finalising the valuation. There is no significant 
risk of material adjustment to the carrying amount of the 
intangible assets within the next twelve months.

Useful economic lives of intangible assets
The Directors have estimated the useful economic lives of 
the acquired customer intangible assets to be 20 years 
based upon attrition rates and the Directors’ judgement. 
These lives are reviewed and updated annually. There is no 
significant risk of material adjustment to the carrying 
amount of the intangible assets within the next 
twelve months.

Useful economic lives of property, plant and 
equipment
Property, plant and equipment is depreciated over the 
useful lives of the assets. Useful lives are based on 
management’s estimates of the period that the assets will 
generate revenue, which are reviewed annually for 
continued appropriateness. The carrying values are tested 
for impairment when there is an indication that the value of 
the assets might be impaired. When carrying out 
impairment tests these would be based upon future cash 
flow forecasts and these forecasts would be based upon 
management judgement. Future events could cause the 
assumptions to change, therefore, this could have an 
adverse effect on the future results of the Group. There is 
no significant risk of material adjustment to the carrying 
amount of the property, plant and equipment within the 
next twelve months.

The useful economic lives applied are set out in the 
accounting policies and are reviewed annually.

(b) Accounting judgements
The following are the areas requiring the use of judgement 
that may significantly impact the Group financial statements:

Capitalisation of internal development costs
Distinguishing the research and development phases of a 
new customised project and determining whether the 
recognition requirements for the capitalisation of 
development costs are met requires judgement. After 
capitalisation, management monitors whether the 
recognition requirements continue to be met and at what 
point amortisation should commence, in addition to 
whether there are any indicators that capitalised costs may 
be impaired.

Capitalised development expenditure is analysed further in 
note 12.

4. Segmental analysis
The Chief Operating Decision Maker (“CODM”) has been 
identified as the Executive Directors. The Directors have 
determined that the operating segments, based on these 
reports, are:
• Brand Addition - sale of promotional product through 

complex services provided under framework contracts on 
an international basis; and

• Facilisgroup - provision of technology, consolidated buying 
power and community learning and networking events to 
SME promotional product distributors in North America 
through subscription-based services.

Segment information about the above businesses is 
presented on the following page. 

The Executive Directors assess the performance of the 
operating segments based on Adjusted EBITDA. Other 
information provided to the Directors is measured in a 
manner consistent with that in the financial statements. 
Inter-segment transactions are entered into under the 
normal commercial terms and conditions that would also be 
available to unrelated third parties. Segment assets exclude 
centrally held cash at bank and in hand. 

101

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021Notes to the Group financial statements
(continued)

4. Segmental analysis (continued)
Major customers 
In 2021 there were two major customers that individually accounted for at least 10% of total revenues (2020: two 
customers). The revenues relating to these customers in 2021 were £33,215,000 (2020: £21,079,000) and both related to 
the Brand Addition segment.

Analysis of revenue by geographical destination 

United Kingdom

Continental Europe

US

Rest of World

Total revenue

Year ended 
31 December 
2021
£’000

Year ended 
31 December 
2020
£’000

26,961

38,914

31,675

17,551

115,101

22,274

24,741

25,332

10,027

82,374

The geographical revenue information above is based on the location of the customer.

Included within Rest of World is £11,638,000 of revenue from China.

All the above revenues are generated from contracts with customers and are recognised at a point in time or over time as 
follows:

At a point in time

Over time

Total revenue

Year ended 
31 December 
2021
£’000

Year ended 
31 December 
2020
£’000

102,916

12,185

115,101

73,135

9,239

82,374

All non-current assets of the Group reside in the UK, with the exception of non-current assets with a net book value of 
£27,111,000 (2020: £26,396,000) which were located in North America and £711,000 (2020: £760,000) located in other 
foreign countries.

102

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021FINANCIAL STATEMENTS4. Segmental analysis (continued)
Income statement for the year ended 31 December 2021

Revenue

Cost of goods sold

Gross profit

Operating expenses

Total operating expenses

Operating profit/(loss)

  Analysed as:
  Adjusted EBITDA
  Depreciation
  Amortisation
  Share-based payment charge

  Total operating profit/(loss)

Finance expense 

Profit/(loss) before taxation
Income tax (expense)/income

Profit/(loss) for the year

Brand
Addition
£’000

102,383

(73,128)

29,255

(22,133)

Facilisgroup
£’000

12,718

-

12,718

(7,577)

Central
operations
£’000

Year ended
31 December
 2021
£’000

-

-

-

115,101

(73,128)

41,973

(2,397)

(32,107)

(22,133)

(7,577)

(2,397)

(32,107)

7,122

5,141

(2,397)

9,866

9,932

(1,410)

(1,136)

(264)

7,122

(378)

6,744

(865)

5,879

7,581

(533)

(1,675)

(232)

(2,135)

(43)

-

(219)

5,141

(2,397)

(26)

5,115

(1,131)

3,984

(145)

(2,542)

26

(2,516)

15,378

(1,986)

(2,811)

(715)

9,866

(549)

9,317

(1,970)

7,347

103

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021Brand
Addition
£’000

Facilisgroup
£’000

Central
operations
£’000

As at 
31 December 
2021
£’000

37,728

4,766

146

17,946

3,083

58

42,640

21,087

10,093

25,415

10,335

45,843

88,483

4,018

-

4,018

985

26,500

28

27,513

31,531

56,952

-

3,930

1,230

5,160

26,247

2,349

3,035

5,384

328

2,752

36

3,116

8,500

17,747

-

78

96

174

-

77

486

563

737

21

-

21

71

813

(44)

840

861

(124)

55,674

7,927

300

63,901

10,093

29,422

12,051

51,566

115,467

6,388

3,035

9,423

1,384

30,065

20

31,469

40,892

74,575

Notes to the Group financial statements
(continued)

4. Segmental analysis (continued)
Statement of financial position as at 31 December 2021

ASSETS

Non-current assets
Intangible assets

Property, plant and equipment

Deferred tax asset

Total non-current assets

Current assets
Inventories

Trade and other receivables

Cash and cash equivalents

Total current assets

TOTAL ASSETS

LIABILITIES

Non-current liabilities
Lease liability

Deferred tax liability

Total non-current liabilities

Current liabilities
Lease liability

Trade and other payables

Current tax liability/(asset)

Total current liabilities

TOTAL LIABILITIES

NET ASSETS/(LIABILITIES)

104

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021FINANCIAL STATEMENTS4. Segmental analysis (continued)
Income statement for the year ended 31 December 2020

Revenue

Cost of goods sold

Gross profit

Operating expenses

Operating expenses – exceptional

Total operating expenses

Operating profit/(loss)

  Analysed as:
  Adjusted EBITDA

  Depreciation

  Amortisation

  Share-based payment charge

  Exceptional items

Total operating profit/(loss)

Finance expense 

Profit/(loss) before taxation
Income tax (expense)/income

Profit/(loss) for the year

Brand
Addition
£’000

72,608

(51,382)

21,226

(18,233)

(429)

Facilisgroup
£’000

Central
operations
£’000

Year ended 
31 December 
2021
£’000

9,766

-

9,766

(5,077)

(42)

-

-

-

82,374

(51,382)

30,992

(1,471)

(24,781)

(71)

(542)

(18,662)

(5,119)

(1,542)

(25,323)

2,564

4,647

(1,542)

5,669

5,209

(1,316)

(900)

-

(429)

2,564

(433)

2,131

(176)

1,955

5,994

(242)

(1,063)

-

(42)

(1,448)

(9)

-

(14)

(71)

4,647

(1,542)

(29)

4,618

(1,182)

3,436

(238)

(1,780)

469

(1,311)

9,755

(1,567)

(1,963)

(14)

(542)

5,669

(700)

4,969

(889)

4,080

105

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021Brand
Addition
£’000

Facilisgroup
£’000

Central
operations
£’000

As at
31 December 
2020
£’000

37,839

5,558

23

16,178

3,424

-

43,420

19,602

12,109

19,353

5,677

310

37,449

-

1,571

538

474

2,583

-

120

470

590

-

64

851

45

960

54,017

9,102

493

63,612

12,109

20,988

7,066

829

40,992

80,869

22,185

1,550

104,604

4,893

-

-

4,893

1,096

22,995

24,091

28,984

51,885

2,661

930

2,637

6,228

218

2,181

2,399

8,627

13,558

91

-

-

91

20

599

619

710

840

7,645

930

2,637

11,212

1,334

25,775

27,109

38,321

66,283

Notes to the Group financial statements
(continued)

4. Segmental analysis (continued)
Statement of financial position as at 31 December 2020

ASSETS

Non-current assets
Intangible assets

Property, plant and equipment

Deferred tax asset

Total non-current assets

Current assets
Inventories

Trade and other receivables

Cash and cash equivalents

Current tax asset

Total current assets

TOTAL ASSETS

LIABILITIES

Non-current liabilities
Lease liability

Trade and other payables

Deferred tax liability

Total non-current liabilities

Current liabilities
Lease liability

Trade and other payables

Total current liabilities

TOTAL LIABILITIES

NET ASSETS

106

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021FINANCIAL STATEMENTS5. Expenses by nature

Inventory recognised as an expense

Other cost of sales

Total cost of sales
Staff costs (note 6)

Exceptional items (note 7)

Depreciation of property, plant and equipment (note 13)

Amortisation of intangible assets (note 12)

Auditors’ remuneration (note 9)

Share-based payment charge (note 24)

Foreign exchange loss/(gain) and movement in foreign exchange derivative contracts

Increase in provision for expected credit losses

Other external charges 

Total operating expenses

Total cost of sales and operating expenses

Year ended
31 December 
2021
£’000

Year ended
31 December 
2020
£’000

60,881

12,247

73,128

20,239

-

1,986

2,811

211

715

4

13

6,128

32,107

105,235

45,686

5,696

51,382

15,832

542

1,567

1,963

233

14

(47)

12

5,207

25,323

76,705

Depreciation and amortisation are charged to operating expenses in the income statement.

Other external charges include a credit of £500,000 (2020: £nil) from the use of Government schemes.

6. Staff costs
Personnel costs are analysed below:

Staff costs (including Directors) consist of:

Wages and salaries

Social security costs

Other pension costs

Total staff costs

Year ended
31 December 
2021
£’000

Year ended
31 December 
2020
£’000

17,676

2,001

562

20,239

13,861

1,540

431

15,832

Additional staff costs of £3,667,000 (2020: £1,688,000) have been capitalised as intangible assets (see note 12).

Wages and salaries

Social security costs

Other pension costs

Total staff costs

Year ended
31 December 
2021
£’000

Year ended
31 December 
2020
£’000

3,615

1,660

32

20

18

10

3,667

1,688

In 2020, savings of £2,000,000 from the use of Government furlough or equivalent schemes were credited to wages and 
salaries in the year.

107

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021Notes to the Group financial statements
(continued)

6. Staff costs (continued)
Defined contribution scheme
The amount recognised in the income statement as an expense in relation to the Group’s defined contribution schemes is 
£562,000 (2020: £431,000). Included within accruals and other creditors is £23,000 (2020: £15,000) for outstanding 
contributions to the defined contribution schemes.

During the year, the monthly average number of the Group’s employees (including Executive Directors and temporary 
employees) was as follows:

By function:

Management

Sales and distribution

Administration

Total employees

Year ended
31 December 
2021
No.

Year ended
31 December
2020
No.

17

226

218

461

13

221

200

434

Key management compensation 
Key management of the Group is considered to be the Board of Directors. Details of Directors’ remuneration is disclosed in 
the Report of the Remuneration Committee on page 76. Remuneration paid to these individuals on an aggregated basis is 
as follows:

Salaries including bonuses and social security costs

Pension contributions

Short term benefits

Total remuneration

7. Operating expenses - exceptional

Reorganisation and restructuring

Transaction costs

Total exceptional

Year ended
31 December 
2021
£’000

Year ended
31 December 
2020
£’000

860

-

26

886

541

10

-

551

Year ended
31 December 
2021
£’000

Year ended
31 December 
2020
£’000

-

-

-

430

112

542

Exceptional items relate to the following:
• reorganisation and restructuring – in 2020, costs were incurred in Brand Addition as a result of changes made to 

headcount to align people costs with anticipated ongoing sales volumes; and

• transaction costs - incremental external costs related to the acquisition of software assets and a license in 2020.

108

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021FINANCIAL STATEMENTS8. Finance expense
An analysis is set out below:

Other interest

Unwind of discount finance costs on lease liabilities 

Total finance expense

9. Auditors’ remuneration

Fees payable to the Company’s auditors for the audit of The Pebble Group plc

Fees payable to the Company’s auditors in respect of:

Audit of the Company’s subsidiaries

Total auditors’ remuneration

10. Income tax expense

Current income tax
- UK corporation tax charge for the year

- Adjustments in respect of prior years

- Foreign tax

Total current income tax

Deferred tax
- Deferred tax

- Adjustments in respect of prior years

- Impact of rate change

Total deferred tax

Total income tax expense

Year ended 
31 December 
2021
£’000

Year ended 
31 December 
2020
£’000

168

381

549

267

433

700

Year ended
31 December 
2021
£’000

Year ended
31 December 
2020
£’000

75

136

211

104

129

233

Year ended
31 December 
2021
£’000

Year ended
31 December 
2020
£’000

217

(40)

1,173

1,350

755

(173)

38

620

1,970

-

(112)

445

333

522

48

(14)

556

889

Current taxes comprise the income taxes of the Group companies which posted a taxable profit for the year, while 
deferred taxes show changes in deferred tax assets and liabilities which were recognised by the Group on the temporary 
differences between the carrying amount of assets and liabilities and their amount calculated for tax purposes, and on 
consolidation adjustments, calculated using the rates that are expected to apply in the year these differences will reverse.

109

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021Notes to the Group financial statements
(continued)

10. Income tax expense (continued)

Analysis of charge in year

Reconciliation of total tax charge:

Profit before taxes

Profit before taxes multiplied by the rate of corporation tax in the UK of 19% (2020: 19%)

Effects of:

Adjustments in respect of prior years

Impact of UK rate change

Non-deductible (income)/expenses 

Differences in tax rates in overseas jurisdictions

Unrecognised for deferred tax

Utilisation of unrecognised deferred tax brought forward

Total income tax expense

Year ended
31 December 
2021
£’000

Year ended
31 December 
2020
£’000

9,317

1,770

(213)

38

(24)

382

32

(15)

1,970

4,969

944

(64)

(14)

90

183

503

(753)

889

Factors that may affect future tax charges
The Government made a number of budget announcements on 3 March 2021. These include confirming that the rate of 
corporation tax will increase to 25% from 1 April 2023. This new law was substantively enacted on 24 May 2021. Deferred 
taxes at the balance sheet date have been measured using these enacted tax rates and reflected in these financial 
statements.

Amounts recognised directly in equity
Aggregate deferred tax arising in the reporting period and not recognised in net profit or loss or other comprehensive 
income but directly credited to equity:

Deferred tax: credit relating to employee share schemes – value of employee services

Year ended
31 December 
2021
£’000

Year ended
31 December 
2020
£’000

67

2

11. Earnings per share 
Basic earnings per share are calculated by dividing the earnings attributable to equity shareholders by the weighted 
average number of ordinary shares in issue during the year. 

For diluted earnings per share, the weighted average number of ordinary shares in issue is adjusted to assume conversion 
of all potentially dilutive ordinary shares. The Company has potentially dilutive ordinary shares arising from share options 
granted to employees. Options are dilutive under the Group Sharesave Plan (SAYE), where the exercise price together with 
the future IFRS 2 charge of the option is less than the average market price of the Company’s ordinary shares during the 
year. Options under the LTIP schemes, as defined by IFRS 2, are contingently issuable shares and are therefore only 
included within the calculation of diluted EPS if the performance conditions, as set out in note 24, are satisfied at the end 
of the reporting period, irrespective of whether this is the end of the vesting period or not.
Until 3 June 2021, the Company had 12,564,501 non-redeemable deferred shares of £0.01 in issue with no voting, dividend 
or other distribution rights. The stated intention from their creation upon Admission was that they would be purchased in 
their entirety by the Company. As no rights of conversion nor pre-arranged formula to convert deferred shares into 
ordinary shares were included in the Articles of Association, they have never been considered ’convertible securities’. 
Accordingly, deferred shares have not been included in the calculation of diluted earnings per share. The off-market 
buy-back of the deferred shares completed on 3 June 2021 when the deferred shares were immediately cancelled.

The impact of the potentially dilutive share options issued under The Pebble Group Plc Long Term Incentive Plan on 
21 December 2020 and 8 June 2021 and Group Sharesave Plan (SAYE) on 6 October 2021 as detailed in note 24 is 0.01p 
for the year ended 31 December 2021. There is no impact on the basic earnings per share for the year ended 
31 December 2020.

110

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021FINANCIAL STATEMENTS11. Earnings per share (continued)
The calculation of basic earnings per share is based on the following data:

Statutory EPS

Earnings (£’000)
Earnings for the purposes of basic and diluted earnings per 

share being profit for the year attributable to equity shareholders

Number of shares 
Weighted average number of shares for the purposes of basic earnings per share

Weighted average dilutive effects of conditional share awards

Weighted average number of shares for the purposes of diluted earnings per share

Earnings per ordinary share (pence)
Basic earnings per ordinary share (pence)

Diluted earnings per ordinary share (pence)

Year ended
31 December 
2021

Year ended
31 December 
2020

7,347

4,080

167,450,893 167,450,893
-
167,804,498 167,450,893

353,605

4.39

4.38

2.44

2.44

Adjusted EPS
The calculation of adjusted earnings per share is based on the after-tax adjusted operating profit after adding back certain 
costs as detailed in the table below. Adjusted earnings per share figures are given to exclude the effects of amortisation of 
acquired intangible assets, share-based payment charge and exceptional items, all net of taxation, and are considered to 
show the underlying performance of the Group.

Earnings (£’000)
Earnings for the purposes of basic and diluted earnings per share being adjusted earnings

Number of shares 
Weighted average number of shares for the purposes of adjusted earnings per share

Weighted average dilutive effects of conditional share awards

Weighted average number of shares for the purposes of diluted earnings per share

Adjusted earnings per ordinary share (pence)

Basic adjusted earnings per ordinary share (pence)

Diluted adjusted earnings per ordinary share (pence)

The calculation of adjusted earnings per share is based on the following data:

Profit for the year attributable to equity shareholders

Add back/(deduct):

Amortisation charge on acquired intangible assets

Share-based payment charge

Exceptional items

Tax effect of the above

Adjusted earnings

Year ended
31 December 
2021

Year ended
31 December 
2020

8,599

4,965

167,450,893 167,450,893
-
167,804,498 167,450,893

353,605

5.14

5.12

2.96

2.96

Year ended
31 December 
2021
£’000

Year ended
31 December 
2020
£’000

7,347

4,080

894

715

-

(357)

8,599

537

14

542

(208)

4,965

111

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021Notes to the Group financial statements
(continued)

12. Intangible assets

Cost

Balance at 1 January 2020

Additions

Disposals

Reclassifications

Balance at 31 December 2020

Impact of foreign exchange translation

Additions

Reclassifications

Goodwill
£’000

Customer
 relationships
£’000

Software and
 development
 costs
£’000

Work in
 progress
£’000

35,882

10,437

11,156

-

-

-

-

-

-

(21)

5,860

(272)

407

35,802

10,144

17,130

3

-

-

97

-

-

100

3,553

538

Impact of foreign exchange translation

(80)

(293)

Balance at 31 December 2021

35,805

10,241

21,321

Accumulated amortisation

Balance at 1 January 2020

Impact of foreign exchange translation

Charge for year

Disposals

Balance at 31 December 2020

Impact of foreign exchange translation

Charge for year

Balance at 31 December 2021

Net book value

At 31 December 2019 

At 31 December 2020

At 31 December 2021

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

635

(15)

537

-

1,157

(13)

503

7,009

(39)

1,426

(272)

8,124

37

2,308

1,647

10,469

35,882

35,802

35,805

9,802

8,987

8,594

4,147

9,006

10,852

Total
£’000

57,811

(394)

6,153

(272)

-

63,298

200

4,292

-

67,790

7,644

(54)

1,963

(272)

9,281

24

2,811

12,116

50,167

54,017

55,674

336

-

293

-

(407)

222

-

739

(538)

423

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

336

222

423

Staff costs of £3,667,000 (2020: £1,688,000) have been capitalised as intangible assets.

On 18 December 2020, Facilisgroup acquired software assets and a license from a US-based software developer, for a total 
cash consideration of $5.3m (£3.8m), included in Software and development costs.

The remaining amortisation periods for customer relationships are between 15 and 17 years (2020: 16 and 18 years) and for 
software and development costs are between 1 and 5 years. 

Goodwill has been tested for impairment. The method, key assumptions and results of the impairment review are detailed 
below.

Goodwill is attributed to the respective cash-generating units (“CGUs”) within the Group (Brand Addition and Facilisgroup). 
Goodwill has been tested for impairment by assessing the value in use of each CGU. The value in use calculations were 
based on projected cash flows in perpetuity. For both CGUs, budgeted cash flows for 2022 to 2026 were used. For Brand 
Addition, these were based on a forecast for 2022 with growth rates of 6% applied to EBITDA. For Facilis, these were 
based on forecasts for 2022 to 2024, with 20% growth rates applied to EBITDA in 2025 and 2026. Subsequent years were 
based on a reduced rate of growth of 2.0% (2020: 2.0%) into perpetuity. Appropriate adjustments were also made for 
changes in working capital and other cash flows to both CGUs. 

These growth rates are based on past experience and market conditions and discount rates are consistent with external 
information. The growth rates shown are the average applied to the cash flows of the individual CGUs and do not form a 
basis for estimating the consolidated profits of the Group in the future. 

The Directors used an estimated market weighted average cost of capital (“WACC”) of 8.9% for Brand Addition and 9.3% 
for Facilisgroup (2020: 9.0% for Brand Addition and 9.4% for Facilisgroup) to discount the cash flows used for the CGUs. 
The value in use calculations described above, together with sensitivity analysis using reasonably possible changes in the key 
assumptions as set out above, indicate the Group has significant headroom and therefore do not give rise to impairment 
concerns. 

112

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021FINANCIAL STATEMENTS12. Intangible assets (continued)
Having completed the impairment reviews at the date of transition and at each subsequent balance sheet date, no 
impairments were identified. 

Goodwill is attributable to the following segments:

Brand Addition

Facilisgroup

The value in use, calculated as described on the previous page and attributable to each CGU is:

Brand Addition

Facilisgroup

As at 
31 December 
2021
£’000

As at 
31 December 
2020
£’000

33,057

2,748

35,805

33,057

2,745

35,802

As at 
31 December 
2021
£’000

As at 
31 December 
2020
£’000

171,111

215,961

153,100

63,200

387,072

216,300

Management considers that no reasonably possible changes would reduce either CGU’s headroom to nil.

113

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021Fixtures and
 fittings
£’000

Computer
 hardware
£’000

Right-of-use
 assets
£’000

Total
£’000

3,854

2,275

10,506

16,635

(33)

241

(349)

(13)

565

(119)

(27)

3,853

(1,537)

(73)

4,659

(2,005)

3,713

2,708

12,795

19,216

19

160

-

(2)

520

-

45

461

(517)

62

1,141

(517)

3,892

3,226

12,784

19,902

3,144

1,865

5,545

10,554

(23)

163

(349)

(9)

240

(119)

2,935

1,977

16

182

-

10

336

-

30

1,164

(1,537)

5,202

20

1,468

(171)

(2)

1,567

(2,005)

10,114

46

1,986

(171)

3,133

2,323

6,519

11,975

710

778

759

410

731

903

4,961

7,593

6,265

6,081

9,102

7,927

As at 
31 December 
2021
£’000

As at 
31 December 
2020
£’000

6,069

140

56

6,265

7,267

227

99

7,593

Notes to the Group financial statements
(continued)

13. Property, plant and equipment

Cost

Balance at 1 January 2020

Impact of foreign exchange translation

Additions

Disposals

Balance at 31 December 2020

Impact of foreign exchange translation

Additions

Disposals

Balance at 31 December 2021

Accumulated depreciation

Balance at 1 January 2020

Impact of foreign exchange translation

Charge for the year

Disposals

Balance at 31 December 2020

Impact of foreign exchange translation

Charge for the year

Disposals

Balance at 31 December 2021

Net book value

Balance at 31 December 2019

Balance at 31 December 2020

Balance at 31 December 2021

Right-of-use assets – net book value

Leasehold property

Fixtures and fittings

Computer hardware

Total Right-of-use assets – net book value

114

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021FINANCIAL STATEMENTS14. Deferred tax assets and liabilities
Deferred tax assets and liabilities are analysed as follows:

Accelerated capital allowances

Other short-term timing differences

On losses

Total deferred tax asset

On intangible assets

Total deferred tax liability

As at 
31 December 
2021
£’000

As at 
31 December 
2020
£’000

64

236

-

300

15

11

467

493

(3,035)

(3,035)

(2,637)

(2,637)

The above amounts reflect the differences between the carrying and tax amounts as at each year end.

Of the deferred tax balances at year end, £41,000 (2020: £493,000) of the deferred tax asset and £660,000 
(2020: £347,000) of the deferred tax liability are expected to be utilised within one year.

Changes during each year are as follows:

Balance at 1 January 2020

Tax credit /(charge) in respect of current year

Foreign exchange translation

Balance at 31 December 2020

Tax charge in respect of current year

Tax credit directly credited to equity

Foreign exchange translation

Balance at 31 December 2021

Asset
£’000

167

326

-

493

(260)

67

-

Liability
£’000

(1,816)

(882)

61

(2,637)

(360)

-

(38)

300

(3,035)

There are unrecognised deferred tax assets relating to capital losses of £9,900,000 (2020: £9,900,000) and in respect of 
trading losses of £535,000 (2020: £503,000). The Directors have assessed that there will not be sufficient taxable profits 
available in future periods, for the companies in the Group in which these losses reside, in order to utilise these losses.

15. Inventories

Finished goods for resale

Total closing inventories

Stocks are stated after provisions for impairment of £209,000 (2020: £205,000). 

There is no difference between the replacement cost of stocks and carrying value. 

As at
31 December 
2021
£’000

As at
31 December 
2020
£’000

10,093

10,093

12,109

12,109

115

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021Notes to the Group financial statements
(continued)

16. Trade and other receivables

Amounts falling due within one year:

Trade receivables not past due

Trade receivables past due

Provision for trade receivables

Trade receivables net
Contract assets

Other debtors

FX derivative

Prepayments

As at 
31 December
2021
£’000

As at
31 December
2020
£’000

19,461

4,030

(57)

14,256

2,254

(57)

23,434

16,453

780

1,342

266

3,600

29,422

675

892

22

2,946

20,988

We have identified £2,008,000 included in trade receivables not past due in 2020 that should have been classified as 
prepayments and so have amended the above note by £2,008,000 to reclassify those balances between trade receivables 
not past due and prepayments. The overall trade and other receivables balance has not changed.

Currency analysis

Sterling

Euro

US Dollar

Chinese Renminbi

Other

Total trade and other receivables

As at 
31 December
2021
£’000

As at
31 December
2020
£’000

4,922

10,579

11,007

2,079

835

29,422

3,391

8,728

7,387

932

550

20,988

Any fair value difference on trade and other receivables is not material. Trade and other receivables are considered past 
due once they have passed their contracted due date. Trade and other receivables are assessed for impairment based 
upon the expected credit losses model.

The Group’s customer base is predominantly made up of high-quality organisations with a high credit rating. In order to 
manage credit risk, the Directors set limits for customers based on a combination of payment history and third-party 
credit references. Credit limits are reviewed on a regular basis in conjunction with debt ageing and collection history. The 
maturity analysis of financial assets (which comprise trade receivables, other debtors, and contract assets) is analysed 
below.

Trade receivables, other receivables and 
contract assets:
– Not yet due

– Up to 3 months overdue 

– 3 to 6 months past due

– Over 6 months past due

Gross
£’000

Provision
£’000

21,583

3,092

700

238

25,613

-

-

-

(57)

(57)

2021
net
£’000

21,583

3,092

700

181

Gross
£’000

Provision
£’000

15,823

1,778

347

129

-

-

-

(57)

(57)

2020
net
£’000

15,823

1,778

347

72

18,020

25,556

18,077

The Group uses objective evidence as well as considering forward-looking information and the probability of default when 
calculating expected credit losses. The maturity of financial assets is therefore used as an indicator as to the probability of 
default. The maximum amount of exposure to credit risk is the total value of unprovided trade and other receivables as set 
out above. There are no amounts outstanding on financial assets that were written off during the reporting period and 
which are still subject to enforcement activity.

116

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021FINANCIAL STATEMENTS16. Trade and other receivables (continued)
Trade receivables are recognised initially at fair value and subsequently measured at amortised cost using the effective 
interest method, less provision for impairment. The Group uses the simplified approach to measure the loss allowance at 
an amount equal to lifetime expected credit losses for trade receivables. There is limited concentration of credit risk with 
respect to trade receivables due to the diverse and unrelated nature of the Group’s customers. Accordingly, the Directors 
believe that no further credit provision is required in excess of the provision for impairment of receivables. 

17. Cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents

Currency analysis

Sterling

Euro

US Dollar

Other

Total cash and cash equivalents

18. Non-current liabilities

IFRS 16 lease liability (note 20)

Deferred consideration

Total non-current liabilities

As at 
31 December
2021
£’000

As at
31 December
2020
£’000

12,051

7,066

As at 
31 December
2021
£’000

As at
31 December
2020
£’000

1,293

5,030

4,310

1,418

12,051

1,232

2,481

2,103

1,250

7,066

As at 
31 December
2021
£’000

As at
31 December
2020
£’000

6,388

-

6,388

7,645

930

8,575

Deferred consideration relates to the software asset and license acquisition from a US-based developer in 
December 2020. 

Currency analysis

Sterling

Euro

US Dollar

Chinese Renminbi

Other

As at 
31 December
2021
£’000

As at
31 December
2020
£’000

2,167

102

3,911

119

89

6,388

2,739

323

5,225

132

156

8,575

117

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021Notes to the Group financial statements
(continued)

19. Current liabilities

IFRS 16 lease liability (note 20)

Lease liabilities
Corporation tax

Current tax liabilities
Trade payables

Other taxation and social security

Other payables

Accruals

Contract liabilities

Deferred consideration

Trade and other payables

Total current liabilities

As at
31 December 
2021
£’000

As at
31 December 
2020
£’000

1,384

1,384

20

20

1,334

1,334

-

-

14,955

15,521

989

533

6,934

5,682

972

30,065

31,469

445

255

5,611

3,591

352

25,775

27,109

Revenues totalling £2,920,000 were recognised in the year ended 31 December 2021 that were included in the contract 
liabilities balance as at 31 December 2020 (£1,198,000 recognised in the year ended 31 December 2020 that were included 
in the contract liabilities balance as at 31 December 2019).

Deferred consideration relates to the software asset and license acquisition from a US-based developer in 
December 2020.

We have identified £1,113,000 included in trade payables and £1,875,000 included in other payables in 2020 that should 
have been classified as contract liabilities and so have amended the above note by £2,988,000 to reclassify those balances 
between trade payables, other payables and contract liabilities. The overall current liabilities balance has not changed. 

Currency analysis

Sterling

Euro

US Dollar

Chinese Renminbi

Other

Total current liabilities

The fair value of financial liabilities approximates to their carrying value due to short maturities.

As at
31 December 
2021
£’000

As at
31 December 
2020
£’000

9,836

11,285

8,600

1,135

613

31,469

9,877

10,112

6,121

625

374

27,109

118

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021FINANCIAL STATEMENTS20. Leases
Amounts recognised in the Consolidated statement of financial position 
The Consolidated statement of financial position shows the following amounts relating to leases:

Right-of-use assets

Balance at 1 January 2020

Impact of foreign exchange translation

New leases recognised in the year

Depreciation charge for the year

Balance at 31 December 2020

Impact of foreign exchange translation

New leases recognised in the year

Disposals

Depreciation charge for the year

Balance at 31 December 2021

£’000

4,961

(57)

3,853

(1,164)

7,593

25

461

(346)

(1,468)

6,265

These are included within “Property, plant and equipment” in the Consolidated statement of financial position.

Lease liabilities

Maturity analysis – contractual undiscounted cash flows:

Less than one year

More than one year, less than two years

More than two years, less than three years

More than three years, less than four years

More than four years, less than five years

More than five years

Total undiscounted lease liabilities at year end

Finance costs

Total discounted lease liabilities at year end

Lease liabilities included in the statement of financial position:

Current

Non-current

Amounts recognised in the Consolidated income statement
The Consolidated income statement shows the following amounts relating to leases:

Depreciation charge – fixtures and fittings

Depreciation charge – computer hardware

Interest expense (within finance expense)

As at
31 December 
2021
£’000

As at
31 December 
2020
£’000

1,716

1,440

1,273

1,200

1,202

2,338

9,169

(1,397)

7,772

1,384

6,388

7,772

1,761

1,703

1,403

1,204

1,185

3,513

10,769

(1,790)

8,979

1,334

7,645

8,979

Year ended
31 December 
2021
£’000

Year ended
31 December 
2020
£’000

1,424

44

1,468

381

1,120

44

1,164

433

The above leases relate to office space, computer equipment and motor vehicles. The net book value by category is set 
out in note 13.

Any expense for short-term and low-value leases is not material and has not been presented.

119

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021Notes to the Group financial statements
(continued)

21. Share capital
The authorised, issued and fully paid number of shares are set out below:

Ordinary shares of 1p each:

At 1 January 2021

Purchase of deferred shares

At 31 December 2021

Ordinary 
shares
Number

Deferred 
shares
Number

Total share 
capital
£

Share 
premium
£

167,450,893 12,564,501

1,800,154

78,451,312

- (12,564,501)

(125,645)

-

167,450,893

-

1,674,509

78,451,312

The ordinary shares have full voting, dividend and capital distribution rights, including on winding up. They are 
non-redeemable.

The Company purchased all of the deferred shares on the date of the Company’s Annual General Meeting in 2021. 
Until 3 June 2021, the Company had 12,564,501 non-redeemable deferred shares of £0.01 in issue with no voting, dividend 
or other distribution rights. The stated intention from their creation upon Admission was that they would be purchased in 
their entirety by the Company. As no rights of conversion nor pre-arranged formula to convert deferred shares into 
ordinary shares were included in the Articles of Association, they have never been considered ’convertible securities’. 
Accordingly, deferred shares have not been included in the calculation of diluted earnings per share. The off-market 
buy-back of the deferred shares completed on 3 June 2021 when the deferred shares were immediately cancelled.

22. Analysis and reconciliation of net cash/(debt)

Cash at bank and in hand

Lease liabilities

Net cash/(debt)

Cash at bank and in hand 

Lease liabilities

Net (debt)/cash

1 January 
2020
£’000

8,861

(6,340)

2,521

New leases
£’000

Cash flow
£’000

-

(3,853)

(3,853)

(1,366)

1,141

(225)

New leases
£’000

Lease disposals
£’000

Cash flow
£’000

Foreign 
exchange 
adjustments
£’000

31 December 
2020
£’000

(429)

73

(356)

7,066

(8,979)

(1,913)

Foreign 
exchange 
adjustments
£’000

31 December 
2021
£’000

-

(461)

(461)

-

360

360

4,792

1,360

6,152

193

(52)

141

12,051

(7,772)

4,279

1 January 
2021
£’000

7,066

(8,979)

(1,913)

120

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021FINANCIAL STATEMENTSCredit risk
The Group’s principal financial assets are cash, trade 
receivables, other receivables and contract assets. 
Contract assets, when invoiced, are recognised in trade 
receivables. The credit risk associated with cash is limited, 
as the counterparties have high credit ratings assigned by 
international credit rating agencies. The principal credit risk 
arises therefore from the Group’s trade receivables. 
In order to manage credit risk; the Directors set limits for 
customers based on a combination of payment history and 
third-party credit references. Credit limits are reviewed on 
a regular basis in conjunction with debt ageing and 
collection history. The credit losses historically incurred by 
the Group have been negligible as referred in note 16.

Liquidity risk
The Group seeks to manage financial risk by ensuring 
sufficient liquidity is available to meet foreseeable needs by 
closely managing the cash balance.

The Group policy throughout the year has been to ensure 
continuity of funding. Short-term flexibility is achieved by 
revolving working capital facilities. 

The Company is party to a Group cross-guarantee banking 
arrangement, which is a revolving credit facility of 
£10,000,000 expiring in November 2023. Interest was 
charged at a rate of LIBOR + 1.9% up to November 2021. 
From this point, interest is charged at a rate of SONIA + 
1.9% and no significant impact is expected from this change. 
As at year end the balance on the facility was £nil. There is 
also an overdraft facility of 10,000,000 RMB for Brand 
Addition (Shanghai) Trading Co. Limited, which is guaranteed 
by the Company. At year end, the balance on the facility 
was £nil.

23. Financial risk management and financial 
instruments by category
The Group uses various financial instruments. These include 
cash, issued equity instruments and various items, such as 
trade receivables and trade payables that arise directly 
from its operations. The main purpose of these financial 
instruments is to raise finance for the Group’s operations.

The existence of these financial instruments exposes the 
Group to a number of financial risks, which are described in 
more detail below.

The main risks arising from the Group’s financial instruments 
are market risk, credit risk and liquidity risk. The Directors 
review and agree policies for managing each of these risks 
and they are summarised below.

Market risk
Market risk encompasses three types of risk, being currency 
risk, interest rate risk and price risk. In this instance, price 
risk has been ignored as it is not considered a material risk 
to the business. The Group’s policies for managing interest 
rate risk are set out in the subsection entitled “Interest rate 
risk” below.

Currency risk
The Group contracts with certain customers and suppliers 
in Euros and Dollars and manages this foreign currency risk 
using forward foreign exchange contracts. Hedge 
accounting is not applied. The Group’s exposure to foreign 
currency risk at the end of the reporting period is set out in 
notes 16, 17, 18 and 19.

As the Group derives an amount of its earnings from 
overseas operations, the Group is affected by movements 
in exchange rates. This would affect both the statement of 
financial position and the income statement. For a 10% 
strengthening in the Sterling exchange rate, operating profit 
would reduce by £513,000 (2020: £866,000) and net assets 
would decrease by £2,452,000 (2020: £2,131,000). A 10% 
weakening of the Sterling against the individual functional 
currencies would have the equal and opposite effect on 
operating profit and net assets as shown above on the basis 
that all other variables remain constant.

Interest rate risk, including cash flow interest 
rate risk
The Group finances its operations through retained profits. 
The Group is therefore not susceptible to interest rate risk.

121

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021Notes to the Group financial statements
(continued)

23. Financial risk management and financial instruments by category (continued)
Summary of financial assets and liabilities by category
The carrying amount of financial assets and liabilities recognised may also be categorised as follows:

Financial assets
Financial assets measured at amortised cost

Trade and other receivables

Contract assets

Cash and cash equivalents

Financial assets measured at fair value through profit or loss

FX derivative asset

Financial liabilities
Financial liabilities measured at amortised cost

Non-current:

Lease liability

Deferred consideration

Current:

Lease liability

Trade and other payables

Accruals

Contract liabilities

Deferred consideration

Net financial assets and liabilities

Non-financial assets and liabilities
Plant, property and equipment

Goodwill

Other intangible assets

Inventory

Prepayments

Deferred tax asset

Deferred tax liability

Other taxation and social security

Current tax (liability)/asset

Total equity

As at
31 December 
2021
£’000

As at
31 December 
2020
£’000

24,776

780

12,051

37,607

266

37,873

(6,388)

-

(1,384)

(15,488)

(6,934)

(5,682)

(972)

17,345

675

7,066

25,086

22

25,108

(7,645)

(930)

(1,334)

(15,776)

(5,611)

(3,591)

(352)

(36,848)

(35,239)

1,025

(10,131)

7,927

35,805

19,869

10,093

3,600

300

9,102

35,802

18,215

12,109

2,946

493

(3,035)

(2,637)

(989)

(20)

73,550

74,575

(445)

829

76,414

66,283

The maturity analysis for lease liabilities is presented in note 18. All other financial liabilities have a maturity of less than 
12 months (i.e., are all current).

122

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021FINANCIAL STATEMENTS23. Financial risk management and financial instruments by category (continued)
Capital management policies and procedures
The Group’s capital management objectives are:
• to ensure the Group’s ability to continue as a going concern; and
• to provide an adequate return to shareholders by pricing products and services commensurately with the level of risk.
This is achieved through close management of working capital and regular reviews of pricing. Decisions on whether to raise 
funding using debt or equity are made by the Board based on the requirements of the business.

Capital for the reporting period under review is shown in the table on the previous page.

The only derivative financial instrument assets used by the Group are foreign currency forward contracts that are disclosed 
in the table on the previous page. These derivatives are only used for economic hedging purposes and not as speculative 
investments. They are classified as “held for trading” for accounting purposes and are accounted for at fair value through 
profit or loss. They are presented as current assets or liabilities to the extent they are expected to be settled within 
12 months after the end of the reporting period.

The gross value of foreign currency forward contracts held at the end of the reporting period was €16,435,000. 
The contracts mature within one to twelve months of the year end.

24. Share-based payments
In the year ended 31 December 2021 the Group operated equity-settled share-based payment plans as described below.

The Group recognised total expenses of £715,000 (2020: £13,569) in respect of equity-settled share-based payment 
transactions in the year ended 31 December 2021.

The Pebble Group Plc Long Term Incentive Plan (the ’LTIP’)
Certain employees of the Company, along with other Group employees, have been granted share options on 21 December 
2020 and 8 June 2021 under the LTIP.

Under the LTIP, the Group has made awards over 2,208,570 (2020: 1,248,060) conditional shares to certain Directors and 
employees.

The vesting of most of these awards is subject to the Group achieving certain performance targets under the LTIP, 
measured over a three-year period, as set out in the Remuneration Report. The options are split into two parts with the 
amount of Part 1 options that will vest depending on achievement of the Group’s Basic Adjusted EPS (“AEPS”) whilst Part 2 
depends on absolute total shareholder return (“TSR”) that will vest depending on performance of the Company’s 
Absolute TSR:

Part 1 options - Basic AEPS

Part 2 options - TSR

Proportion 
of award

70%

30%

Details of the maximum total number of ordinary shares which may be issued in future periods in respect of LTIP awards 
outstanding at 31 December 2021 are shown below:

At 1 January 2021

Granted in the year

Lapsed in the year

At 31 December 2021

Number of 
shares

1,248,060

960,510

(134,324)

2,074,246

123

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021Notes to the Group financial statements
(continued)

24. Share-based payments (continued)
The fair value at grant date is independently determined using an adjusted form of the Black-Scholes model which includes 
a Monte Carlo simulation model that takes into account the exercise price, the term of the option, the share price at grant 
date and expected price volatility of the underlying share based on the AIM Price Index over the past 3 years, and the 
risk-free interest rate for the term of the option as shown below.

Share price at grant date

Exercise price

Expected volatility

Expected life

Expected dividend yield

Risk-free interest rate

Fair value per option

Performance conditions

2020 award
TSR condition

2020 award
AEPS condition

2021 award
TSR condition

2021 award
AEPS condition

105.0p

£nil

17.2%

3 years

0%

0.53%

22.3p

105.0p

130.0p

130.0p

£nil

-

3 years

-

-

110.5p

£nil

17.5%

3 years

0%

0.53%

28.2p

£nil

-

3 years

-

-

153.0p

2020 award 
3 years ended 
30 June 
2023

2021 award 
3 years ended 
31 December 
2023

13.4p
14.3p
15.1p

15.4p
16.3p
17.3p

70% Cumulative adjusted EPS
Basic adjusted EPS as defined in the LTIP rules, 
excludes share-based payment charge, exceptional 
items and amortisation from acquired intangibles

Threshold (25% of maximum vesting) 
Mid-range (60% of maximum vesting) 
Maximum (100% of maximum vesting)

30% Annualised TSR
Annualised growth in total 
shareholder returns

Threshold (25% maximum vesting)
Mid-range (60% maximum vesting)
Maximum (100% maximum vesting)

8.0% pa
11.3% pa
15.0% pa

8.0% pa
11.3% pa
15.0% pa

The Pebble Group Plc Group Sharesave Plan (the ’SAYE’) 
Certain eligible employees of the Company, along with other Group employees, have been granted share options on 
6 October 2021 under its Sharesave Plan and its sub-plan, the International Sharesave Plan.

The SAYE provides for an exercise price equal to the quoted mid-market price of the Company shares on the business day 
immediately preceding the date of grant, less a discount of twenty per cent, of £1.22. The vesting period under the scheme 
is three years and no performance conditions, other than remaining a Group employee, are attached to the options.

Under the SAYE, the Group has made awards of 937,223 conditional shares to certain Directors and employees.

Details of the maximum total number of ordinary shares which may be issued in future periods in respect of SAYE awards 
outstanding at 31 December 2021 are shown below:

At 1 January 2021

Granted in the year

Lapsed in the year

At 31 December 2021

Number of 
shares

-

937,223

(13,513)

923,710

25. Related party transactions 
The Directors consider there to be no ultimate controlling party. During the current and prior year, related parties include 
representatives of major shareholders and parent and intermediate parent entities ultimately owned by the same 
shareholders. 

Details of key management compensation are given in note 6. There are no other related party transactions to be disclosed 
for the current and prior year.

124

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021FINANCIAL STATEMENTSCompany balance sheet
As at 31 December 2021

Fixed assets
Investments

Current assets

Trade and other receivables (including £80,684,000 (2020: £3,000) falling due after 
more than one year) 

Creditors: amounts falling due within one year

Net current assets

Total assets less current liabilities

Net assets

Capital and reserves
Called up share capital

Share premium

Capital reserve

Merger relief reserve

Share-based payment reserve

Retained earnings

Total shareholders’ funds

Note

2021
£’000

2020
£’000

5

6

7

8

9

112,291

126,106

81,012

81,012

60,203

60,203

(324)

(198)

80,688

192,979

192,979

1,675

78,451

125

713

681

60,005

186,111

186,111

1,800

78,451

–

713

13

111,334

192,979

105,134

186,111

The Company has taken advantage of the exemption permitted by Section 408 of the Companies Act 2006 not to produce 
its own profit and loss account. The profit for the year dealt within the financial statements of the Company was 
£6,200,000 (2020: £2,365,000).

The Company financial statements on pages 125 to 130 were approved by the Board of Directors on 22 March 2022 and 
were signed on its behalf by:

C Thomson 
Director 
22 March 2022

The notes on pages 127 to 130 form part of these Company financial statements.

125

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021 
Company statement of changes in equity
for the year ended 31 December 2021

At 1 January 2020

Profit for the year

Total comprehensive income for 
the year

Employee share schemes – value 
of employee services (note 9)

Total transactions with owners, 
recognised in equity

Share
capital
£’000

1,800

Share
premium
£’000

78,451

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

Balance at 31 December 2020

1,800

78,451

Profit for the year

Total comprehensive income for 
the year

–

–

Purchase of deferred shares

(125)

Employee share schemes – value 
of employee services (note 9)

Deferred tax on employee share 
schemes

Total transactions with owners, 
recognised in equity

–

–

(125)

–

–

–

–

–

–

Balance at 31 December 2021

1,675

78,451

Capital 
reserve
£’000

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

125

–

–

125

125

Merger 
relief
reserve
£’000

713

–

–

–

–

713

–

–

–

–

–

–

713

Share-based 
payment 
reserve
£’000

–

–

–

13

13

13

–

–

–

601

67

668

681

Retained
earnings
£’000

Total
equity
£’000

102,769

183,733

2,365

2,365

2,365

2,365

–

–

13

13

105,134

186,111

6,200

6,200

6,200

6,200

–

–

–

–

–

601

67

668

111,334

192,979

The notes on pages 127 to 130 form part of these Company financial statements.

126

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021FINANCIAL STATEMENTSNotes to the Company financial statements

1. General information
The Pebble Group plc (the “Company”) was incorporated in 
the United Kingdom on 27 September 2019 and is a public 
company limited by shares, registered and domiciled in 
England and Wales. The registered office of the Company is 
Broadway House, Trafford Wharf Road, Trafford Park, 
Manchester, England M17 1DD. The company registration 
number is 12231361. The Company’s principal activity is that 
of a holding company.

2. Accounting policies 
(a) Reporting framework
The separate financial statements of the Company have 
been prepared in accordance with Financial Reporting 
Standard 102, the Financial Reporting Standard applicable in 
the UK and Republic of Ireland (“FRS 102”), on the going 
concern basis under the historical cost convention, and in 
accordance with the Companies Act 2006.

The financial information is presented in Sterling and has 
been rounded to the nearest thousand (£’000).

The principal accounting policies, which have been applied 
consistently to all the years presented, are set out below.

(b)  Financial Reporting Standard 102 – reduced 

disclosure exemptions

The following exemptions from the requirements in FRS 102 
have been applied in the preparation of these financial 
statements:
• the requirements of section 7 Statement of Cash Flows;
• the requirements of section 3 Financial Statement 

Presentation, paragraph 3.17(d);

• the requirements of section 11 Financial Instruments, 

paragraphs 11.41(b), 11.41(c), 11.41(e). 11.41(f), 11.42, 11.44 to 
11.45, 11.48(a)(iii), 11.48(a)(iv),11.48(b) and 11.48(c);
• the requirements of section 12 Other Financial 

Instruments, paragraphs 12.26 to 12.27, 12.29(a), 12.29(b) 
and 12.w9A; and

• the requirements of section 33 Related Party Disclosures, 

paragraph 33.7.

This information is included in the Group financial 
statements found earlier in this report.

(c) Company profit and loss account
The Company has not presented its own profit and loss 
account as permitted by Section 408 of the Companies 
Act 2006. The Company’s profit for the year was 
£6,200,000 (2020: £2,365,000). There are no material 
differences between the profit in the current year and its 
historical cost equivalent. Accordingly, no note of historical 
cost profits and losses has been presented.

(d) Going concern
The Company meets its day-to-day working capital 
requirements through cash generated from the Group in 
which it holds its investment and utilising its overdraft 
facility to fund peak seasonal demands. The Directors have 
prepared cash flow forecasts and projections for the two 
years ending 31 December 2023 for the Group; see the 
going concern disclosure within the Group financial 
statements. Based on this, the Directors are satisfied that 
the Company has adequate resources to continue in 

operational existence for the foreseeable future. For this 
reason, they continue to adopt the going concern basis in 
preparing the Company financial statements.

(e) Dividend distribution
The distribution of a dividend to the Company’s 
shareholders is recognised as a liability in the Company’s 
financial statements in the year in which it is approved by 
the Company’s shareholders.

(f) Investment in subsidiary undertakings
Investments in subsidiaries are stated at cost less 
accumulated impairment.

(g) Taxation
Current tax is provided at amounts expected to be paid 
(or recovered) using the tax rates and laws that have been 
enacted or substantively enacted by the balance 
sheet date. 

Deferred tax is recognised in respect of all timing 
differences that have originated but not reversed at the 
balance sheet date where events or transactions that result 
in an obligation to pay more tax in the future, or a right to 
pay less tax in future, have occurred at the balance sheet 
date. Timing differences are differences between the 
Company’s taxable profits and its results as stated in the 
financial statements that arise from the inclusion of gains 
and losses in tax assessments in periods different from 
those in which they are recognised in the 
financial statements.

A net deferred tax asset is regarded as recoverable and 
therefore recognised only to the extent that, on the basis of 
all available evidence, it can be regarded as more likely than 
not that there will be suitable taxable profits from which the 
future reversal of the underlying timing differences can be 
deducted. Deferred tax is measured at the average tax 
rates that are expected to apply in the periods in which the 
timing differences are expected to reverse based on tax 
rates and laws that have been enacted or substantively 
enacted by the balance sheet date. Deferred tax is 
measured on a non-discounted basis.

(h) Share-based payments
Equity-settled awards are valued at the grant date, and the 
fair value is charged as an expense in the income statement 
spread over the vesting period. Fair value of the awards are 
measured using an adjusted form of the Black-Scholes 
model which includes a Monte Carlo simulation model. The 
fair value of the options, appraised at the grant date, 
includes the impact of market-based vesting conditions 
if applicable. 

Share-based remuneration is recognised as an expense in 
profit or loss with the credit side of the entry being 
recorded in equity. 

Non-market vesting conditions are included in assumptions 
about the number of options that are expected to become 
exercisable. Estimates are subsequently revised if there is 
any indication that the number of share options expected 
to vest differs from previous estimates. Any adjustment to 
cumulative share-based compensation resulting from a 
revision is recognised in the current period. The number of 
vested options ultimately exercised by holders does not 
impact the expense recorded in any period.

127

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021Notes to the Company financial statements
(continued)

Financial assets are derecognised when (a) the contractual 
rights to the cash flows from the asset expire or are settled, 
or (b) substantially all the risks and rewards of the ownership 
of the asset are transferred to another party or (c) despite 
having retained some significant risks and rewards of 
ownership, control of the asset has been transferred to 
another party who has the practical ability to unilaterally sell 
the asset to an unrelated third party without imposing 
additional restrictions. 

Financial liabilities
Basic financial liabilities, including trade and other payables, 
are initially recognised at transaction price.

Trade payables are obligations to pay for goods or services 
that have been acquired in the ordinary course of business 
from suppliers. Accounts payable are classified as current 
liabilities if payment is due within one year or less. If not, 
they are presented as non-current liabilities. Trade payables 
are recognised initially at transaction price and 
subsequently measured at amortised cost using the 
effective interest method.

3. Critical accounting estimates and 
judgements
In the preparation of the Company financial statements, the 
Directors, in applying the accounting policies of the 
Company, make some judgements and estimates that affect 
the reported amounts in the financial statements. The 
following are the areas requiring the use of judgement and 
estimates that may significantly impact the financial 
statements.

Non-current asset impairment
The Directors are required to assess whether there are any 
indicators of impairment at each reporting date. All relevant 
potential indicators are considered, including the 
performance of the underlying trading Group and the 
results of the Group’s impairment reviews performed as at 
the same date. The Directors exercise their judgement in 
determining whether any such indicators exist. Where an 
indicator of impairment is identified in relation to the 
Company’s investments or intercompany receivable 
balances, a full impairment review is performed.

The Directors performed their assessment and concluded 
that no impairment indicators existed at 31 December 2021 
and, as such, a full impairment review over the Company’s 
investments in subsidiaries and intercompany receivables 
was not performed.

4.  Remuneration of directors and auditor
Details of Directors’ remuneration are shown in the 
Directors’ Remuneration Report on page 76 of the Group 
financial statements. Details of auditor’s remuneration are 
shown in note 9 of the Group financial statements. The 
Company has no employees (2020: none).

2. Accounting policies (continued)
(i) Share capital
Ordinary shares are classified as equity. Incremental costs 
directly attributable to the issue of new shares are shown in 
equity as a deduction, net of tax, from the proceeds of 
issue.

(j) Share premium
Share premium represents the difference between the 
nominal value of shares issued and the fair value of 
consideration received. Any transaction costs associated 
with the issuing of shares are deducted from share 
premium, net of any related income tax benefits.

(k) Capital reserve
The capital reserve was created in 2021 as a result of the 
purchase by the Company of all deferred shares in issue.

(l) Merger relief reserve
The merger relief reserve was created during 2019 as a 
result of the share-for-share exchange under which The 
Pebble Group plc became the parent undertaking prior to 
the Initial Public Offering (“IPO”). The merger relief reserve 
includes the premium received on the issue of share capital 
in the share-for-share exchange.

(m) Retained earnings
Retained earnings includes all current and prior period 
retained profits and losses. 

All transactions with owners of the parent are recorded 
separately within equity.

(n) Cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents comprise cash balances. 

(o) Financial instruments
The Company has chosen to adopt Sections 11 and 12 of FRS 
102 in respect of financial instruments.

Financial assets
Basic financial assets, including trade and other receivables, 
cash and bank balances and investments, are initially 
recognised at transaction price, unless the arrangement 
constitutes a financing transaction, where the transaction is 
measured at the present value of the future receipts 
discounted at a market rate of interest. Such assets are 
subsequently carried at amortised cost using the effective 
interest method.

At the end of each reporting period, financial assets 
measured at amortised cost are assessed for objective 
evidence of impairment. If an asset is impaired the 
impairment loss is the difference between the carrying 
amount and the present value of the estimated cash flows 
discounted at the asset's original effective interest rate. The 
impairment loss is recognised in profit or loss.

If there is a decrease in the impairment loss arising from an 
event occurring after the impairment was recognised, the 
impairment is reversed. The reversal is such that the 
current carrying amount does not exceed what the carrying 
amount would have been had the impairment not previously 
been recognised. The impairment reversal is recognised in 
profit or loss.

128

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021FINANCIAL STATEMENTS5. Investments 

Cost and carrying amount

At 1 January 2021

Movement relating to share options

Redemption of preference shares

At 31 December 2021

£’000

126,106

496

(14,311)

112,291

The Company held 13,711,749 A preference shares of £0.00001 each and 599,417 B preference shares of £0.00001 in The 
Pebble Group (Holdings) Limited which were issued at a total price of £14,311,166. Dividends accrued on the preference 
shares at a 10% compounding rate which was non-discretionary, and they were mandatorily redeemable at a fixed future 
date. On 7 December 2021 the Company and The Pebble Group (Holdings) Limited agreed to an early redemption of the 
preference shares and therefore the investment value has been reduced by £14,311,166. This amount plus the accrued 
dividends of £3,146,203 have been set off against an intercompany payable to The Pebble Group (Holdings) Limited. 

The Directors believe that the carrying value of the investments is supported by their underlying net assets.

The Company directly owns the whole of the issued ordinary shares of the following subsidiary undertakings:

Name

Registered address

Principal activity

Class of share

Percentage holding

The Pebble Group (Holdings) Limited Broadway
Project Amber Bidco Limited

Trafford Wharf Road
Manchester
M17 1DD

H.I.G Milan UK Topco Limited

H.I.G Milan UK Midco Limited

H.I.G Milan UK Bidco Limited

Brand Addition Limited

Product Plus International Limited

Gearworks Limited

Brand Addition Asia Limited

Brand Addition Ireland Limited

Brand Addition Reklam Urunleri 
Dagitim ve Ticaret Limited Sirketi

Brand Addition (Shanghai) Trading 
Co., Limited

Unit 1605
16th Floor
Tower 3 Enterprise 
Square
No. 9 Sheung Yuet Road
Kowloon, Hong Kong

Unit G2 
Calmount Business Park
Ballymount, Dublin 12

Buyukdere Caddesi
Meydan Sokak Spring
Giz Plaza Kat:13
Sisli-Istanbul, Turkey

Unit 903-905
T2 Building, VIPARK
500 Xinlong Road 
Minhang District
Shanghai, China

Holding company

Holding company

Holding company

Holding company

Holding company

Ordinary

Ordinary

Ordinary

Ordinary

Ordinary

Promotional merchandise  Ordinary

Non-trading 

Non-trading

Ordinary

Ordinary

Promotional merchandise

Ordinary

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

Promotional merchandise

Ordinary

100%

Promotional merchandise

Ordinary

100%

Promotional merchandise

Ordinary

100%

H.I.G. Milan Germany Bidco GmbH
Brand Addition GmbH

Heydastrasse 13-15
58093 Hagen, Germany

Holding company

Ordinary

Promotional merchandise

Ordinary

The Pebble Group US Bidco Inc.

Gateway CDI Inc.

Facilisgroup LLP

909 North 20th Street
Saint Louis, MO 63103

Holding company

Ordinary

Promotional merchandise

Ordinary

1600 S Brentwood Blvd., 
Ste 800, Brentwood,  
MO 63144

Promotional merchandise 
service provider

Ordinary

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

Facilisgroup Canada Inc.

5320 Canotek Road 
Gloucester, ON K1J 9C1

Promotional merchandise 
service provider

Ordinary

100%

Other than The Pebble Group (Holdings) Limited and Project Amber Bidco Limited, which are directly held by the parent, 
all subsidiaries are indirectly held.

129

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021Notes to the Company financial statements
(continued)

6. Trade and other receivables 

Amounts falling due within one year:

Amounts owed by Group undertakings

Prepayments

Amounts falling due after more than one year:

Amounts owed by Group undertakings

Deferred tax asset

2021
£’000

270

58

328

80,588

96

80,684

2020
£’000

60,135

65

60,200

-

3

3

81,012

60,203

Amounts owed by group undertakings due within one year are unsecured, have no fixed date of repayment and are 
repayable on demand.

Amounts owed by group undertakings due after more than one year are unsecured, repayable in greater than one year and 
bear interest at market rates.

The deferred tax asset recognised relates to share-based payments.

7. Creditors: amounts falling due within one year

Accruals 

2021
£’000

324

324

2020
£’000

198

198

The Company is party to a Group cross-guarantee banking arrangement, which is a revolving credit facility of £10,000,000 
expiring in November 2023. Interest was charged at a rate of LIBOR + 1.9% up to November 2021. From this point, interest 
is charged at a rate of SONIA + 1.9% and no significant impact is expected from this change. As at year end the balance on 
the facility was £nil. There is also an overdraft facility of 10,000,000 RMB for Brand Addition (Shanghai) Trading Co. Limited, 
which is guaranteed by the Company. At year end, the balance on the facility was £nil.

8. Called up share capital 
Details of movements in shares are set out in note 21 to the Group financial statements.

9. Share-based payments 
Details of share-based payments are set out in note 24 to the Group financial statements.

10. Related party transactions
The Company has taken advantage of the exemption included in Section 33 of FRS 102 “Related Party Disclosures” to not 
disclose details of transactions with Group undertakings, on the grounds that it is the parent company of a Group whose 
financial statements are publicly available.

Directors’ transactions
Details of the Directors’ interests in the ordinary share capital of the Company are provided in the Directors’ Report. 

130

The Pebble Group plc Annual Report 2021FINANCIAL STATEMENTSStay up to date at 
thepebblegroup.com

Building brands.
Growing relationships.
Strengthening businesses.

Our values shape our culture, define who we are, what we do and how we act.

We are one team 
using our diverse skills 
and experience to 
support each other’s 
successes and 
challenges, respecting 
our differences.

Enjoying the journey 
in a culture of 
integrity, transparency 
and fairness, where 
we are proud of our 
past and excited by 
our future.

Ambitious in our 
commitment to 
achieving positive 
results with 
sustainable impact.

Learning and growing 
knowing there is always 
progress to be made.

Connected to all  
our stakeholders 
developing long-term 
relationships by 
engaging to understand 
needs and aspirations.

Our history 

2012

2014

2016

2017

Management buy-out of 
Brand Addition, supported 
by H.I.G. Europe Capital 
Partners LP and by 
Beechbrook Capital LLP

Expanded operations into 
Shanghai, established a 
full-service office enabling 
further development of 
overseas capabilities

Acquisition of US-based 
Gateway CDI (now Brand 
Addition US), increasing 
market share and providing 
greater access to the largest 
single regional market for 
promotional products

Secondary management 
buy-out supported by 
Elysian Capital and 
Beechbrook Capital LLP. 
Formation of The Pebble 
Group as parent company to 
Brand Addition

Financial calendar 

Financial year end

Preliminary announcement of full-year results

Publication of Annual Report and financial statements 

Annual General Meeting 

Preliminary announcement of half-year results 

Financial year end 

Company information 

Nominated adviser
Grant Thornton UK LLP

30 Finsbury Square

London EC2A 1AG 

Broker 
Joh. Berenberg, Gossler & Co. KG, London Branch 

60 Threadneedle Street 

London EC2R 8HP 

Auditors 
PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP

1 Hardman Square 

Manchester M2 3DE 

Legal adviser 
Addleshaw Goddard LLP 

One St Peter’s Square 

Manchester M2 3DE 

Registrar 
Equiniti 

Aspect House

Spencer Road

Lancing

West Sussex BN99 6DA

Financial PR 
Belvedere PR 

25 Finsbury Circus 

London EC2M 7EE 

Registered office 
The Pebble Group plc

Broadway House 

Trafford Wharf Road 

Trafford Park 

Manchester M17 1DD 

Company number: 12231361

31 December 2021

22 March 2022

22 April 2022

24 May 2022

Early September 2022

31 December 2022

The material used in this report has 
been harvested in a responsible 
manner from an FSC accredited mill.

Produced and printed by Perivan.

The Pebble Group plc  Annual Report 2021

131

   2021

1
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l
a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
e
l
b
b
e
P
e
h
T

The Pebble Group plc

Annual Report 2021

Building brands.
Growing relationships.
Strengthening businesses.

Broadway House
Trafford Wharf Road
Trafford Park
Manchester M17 1DD